Honda Manual ATLA1717OM

ATLA1717OM 2017 Honda CR-V Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

User Manual: Honda Manual 2017 Honda CR-V Owner's Manual | Manual Device

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 663

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2017
OWNER’S MANUAL

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

0 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Event Data Recorders

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
00X31-TLA-6010

Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is
uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

2017 CR-V Owner's Manual - Ver. 3

AOM05577

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

1 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

A Few Words About Safety

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.

3DANGER

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.

3WARNING

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.

3CAUTION

You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.

● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.

Contents

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.

2 Safe Driving P. 33
For Safe Driving P. 34

Seat Belts P. 40

Airbags P. 49

2 Instrument Panel P. 79
Indicators P. 80

Gauges and Displays P. 117

2 Controls P. 131
Clock P. 132
Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 134
Panoramic Roof*1 P. 168
Moonroof * P. 167
Adjusting the Seats P. 197

2 Features P. 229
Audio System P. 230
Customized Features P. 337

This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.

2 Driving P. 433

The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.

2 Maintenance P. 539

Audio System Basic Operation P. 237, 258
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * P. 370

Before Driving P. 434
Towing a Trailer P. 439
Parking Your Vehicle P. 526 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 531

Before Performing Maintenance P. 540
Maintenance MinderTM P. 543
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 577
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 594

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 601
Tools P. 602
If a Tire Goes Flat P. 603
Overheating P. 617
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 621
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 633

2 Information P. 635
Specifications P. 636
Emissions Testing P. 642

Identification Numbers P. 638
Warranty Coverages P. 644

Contents
Quick Reference Guide
Child Safety P. 63

Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 76

Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 150 Security System P. 161
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 171
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 206

Opening and Closing the Windows P. 164
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 195
Climate Control System P. 224

Audio Error Messages P. 327
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 373, 396

General Information on the Audio System P. 332
Compass * P. 430

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 444
Refueling P. 533

When Driving P. 446
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 536

Braking P. 508
Turbo Engine Vehicle * P. 537

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 553
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 581
Cleaning P. 595

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 570
Battery P. 590
Accessories and Modifications P. 600

Remote Transmitter Care P. 592

Engine Does Not Start P. 610
Fuses P. 628
Refueling P. 634

Jump Starting P. 613
Emergency Towing P. 632

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 640
Authorized Manuals P. 646

Reporting Safety Defects P. 641
Customer Service Information P. 647

P. 4

Safety Labels P. 77

Safe Driving

P. 33

Instrument Panel

P. 79

Controls

P. 131

Features

P. 229

Driving

P. 433

Maintenance

P. 539

Handling the Unexpected

P. 601

Information

P. 635

Index

P. 649

Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 616

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ System Indicators (P80)
❙ Gauges (P117)
❙ Information Display * (P118)
❙ Driver Information Interface * (P121)
❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ Audio System (P237, 258)
❙ Navigation System *
() See the Navigation System Manual

❙ Rear Window Defogger (P190)
❙ Heated Door Mirror Button * (P190)
❙ Climate Control System (P224)
❙ Front Seat Heater Buttons * (P221)
❙ ENGINE START/STOP Button * (P172)
❙ Ignition Switch * (P171)
❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P194)
❙ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Button * (P503)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P495)
❙ Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button * (P483)
❙ Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button * (P520)
❙ Heated Windshield Button * (P191)
❙ Power Tailgate Button * (P154)
4

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P176, 177)
❙ Fog Lights * (P180)
❙ LaneWatchTM* (P500)
❙ Km/Mile Change Knob * (P117)
❙
(Display/Information) Button * (P121)
❙ (TRIP) Knob (P118, 122)
❙ Brightness Control (P188)
❙ Cruise Control Buttons (P458, 461)
❙ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF) Buttons * (P467)
❙ Wipers/Washers (P185)
❙ Interval Button * (P476)
❙ Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button *
(P486)

❙ Heated Steering Wheel Button * (P220)
❙ Horn (Press an area around
.)
❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons *
() See the Navigation System Manual

❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice
Control Buttons (P373, 396)

❙ SOURCE Button * (P233)
❙ ENTER Button * (P121, 233)
❙ (+ / (- /
❙ / /

Buttons * (P233)

Buttons * (P121, 233)
* Not available on all models

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Power Window Switches (P164)
❙ Door Mirror Controls (P196)
❙ Master Door Lock Switch (P 145)
❙ Memory Buttons * (P 193)
❙ SET Button * (P 193)
❙ Rearview Mirror (P195)
❙ Interior Fuse Box (P629)
❙ Driver's Front Airbag
(P52)

❙ Passenger's Front Airbag
(P52)

❙ Electric Parking Brake
Switch (P508)

❙ Automatic Brake Hold
Button (P512)
❙ Glove Box (P209)
❙ ECON Button (P457)
❙ Accessory Power Socket
(P215)

❙ Shift Lever (P455)
❙ Accessory Power Socket
❙ Hood Release Handle (P555)
❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P534)
❙ Driver’s Pocket
6

(P216)

❙ USB Port(s) (P231)

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Accessory Power Socket * (P216)
❙ Cargo Area Light (P208)
❙ Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P46)
❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P71)
❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P72)
❙ Ceiling Light (P206)
❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P58)
❙ Seat Belts (P40)
❙ Moonroof Switch * (P167)
❙ Panoramic Roof Switch * (P168)
❙ Map Lights (P207)
❙ Sunglasses Holder (P219)
❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors
❙ Center Console Box (P210)
❙ Front Seat (P197)
❙ Side Airbags (P56)
❙ USB Ports * (P231)
❙ Rear Seat Heater Buttons *
❙ Coat Hook (P217)
❙ Grab Handle
❙ Rear Seat (P204)
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P68)

(P222)

* Not available on all models

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P553)
❙ Windshield Wipers (P185, 577)
❙ Power Door Mirrors (P196)
❙ Side Turn Signal Lights * (P176, 574)
❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P137)
❙ Headlights (P177, 570)
❙ Front Turn Signal/Front Side Marker Lights
(P176, 574)

❙ Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P177, 184, 574)
❙ Tires (P581, 603)
❙ Fog Lights * (P180, 572)
❙ How to Refuel (P534)
❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P576)
❙ Rear Wiper (P187, 579)
❙ Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P150)
❙ Multi-View Rear Camera (P531)
❙ License Plate Light (P576)
❙ Tailgate Release Button (P159)
❙ Taillights (P575)
❙ Back-Up Lights (P575)
❙ Brake/Taillights (P574)
❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P574)
❙ Rear Side Marker Lights (P574)
8

Eco Assist System

(P457)
Quick Reference Guide

Ambient Meter

● Changes color to reflect your driving
style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
White green: Moderate acceleration/
deceleration
White: Aggressive acceleration/
deceleration
● The ambient meter color changes in
accordance with your brake or
accelerator pedal operation.

ECON Button (P457)
Helps maximize fuel economy.

Models with driver information interface

The message is displayed for a few seconds when the
ECON button is pressed.

ECON Mode Indicator (P93)
Comes on when ECON mode is on.
* Not available on all models

Safe Driving

(P33)

Quick Reference Guide

Airbags (P49)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P63)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P76)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P40)
Before Driving Checklist (P434)
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head
restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been
properly adjusted.

● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.

Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.

Instrument Panel

(P79)

Models with information display

System Indicators
System Indicators

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator

Immobilizer System
Indicator/Security
System Alarm Indicator

Tachometer

Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator

VSA® OFF Indicator

Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

Door Open Indicator

CRUISE MAIN
Indicator

Tailgate Open
Indicator

Automatic Brake Hold
System Indicator

CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator
Temperature Gauge

Speedometer

Fuel Gauge

Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)

Brake Depressing
Indicator
Maintenance Minder
Indicator

Automatic Brake Hold
Indicator
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)

Electric Power
Steering (EPS) System
Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA®) System
Indicator

Power Reduced
Indicator

Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators

Quick Reference Guide

Gauges (P 117)/Information Display * (P 118)/
Driver Information Interface * (P121)/System Indicators (P80)

System Indicators

Lights Indicators

ECON Mode Indicator

Lights On Indicator

Transmission
Temperature
Indicator

Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator

High Beam Indicator

All-wheel drive
(AWD) Indicator *
* Not available on all models

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

12 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Models with driver information interface

System Indicators
Tachometer

System Indicators
Quick Reference Guide

Immobilizer System Indicator/
Security System Alarm Indicator

Malfunction Indicator
Lamp

Low Fuel Indicator

Low Oil Pressure
Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

Charging System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator

CRUISE MAIN
Indicator *

Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA®) System
Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Automatic Brake Hold
System Indicator
U.S.

CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator *
Shift Lever Position
Indicator
Temperature Gauge

Speedometer

Fuel Gauge

Canada

U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada

Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)

Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow
(LSF) Indicator
(Amber/Green) *
Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM)
Indicator *

Automatic Brake Hold
Indicator
ECON Mode Indicator

Electric Power
Steering (EPS) System
Indicator

System Indicators
System Message
Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators

Lights Indicators
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator *
Auto High-beam
System Indicator *

Collision Mitigation
Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) Indicator *
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS)
Indicator (Amber/
Green) *
Blind Spot
Information (BSI)
Indicator *

Controls

(P131)
Models with Display Audio

The audio system receives signals from GPS
satellites, updating the clock automatically.

Models with color audio system

ENGINE START/STOP
Button * (P172)
Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.

Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK
button.

Rotate
.

to change hour, then press

Rotate
press
.

to change minute, then

Select SET, then press

Select the
Settings.

Select Clock, then Clock Adjustment.

Touch the respective 3 / 4 icon to
adjust the hours or minutes up or
down.

Select OK.

Quick Reference Guide

Clock (P132)

(HOME) icon, then select

These indications are used to show how to
operate the Selector knob.
• Rotate
to select.
• Press
to enter.

* Not available on all models

Turn Signals (P176)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Quick Reference Guide

Right

Wipers and Washers
(P185)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
MIST
OFF
AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies
automatically
INT*2: Low speed with
intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe

Left

Lights (P177)
Light Control Switches

High Beam

Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.

Low Beam

Flashing

Adjustment Ring
: Low Sensitivity*1
: Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2
: High Sensitivity*1
: Higher speed, more sweeps*2

*1:Models with automatic intermittent
wipers
*2:Models without automatic intermittent
wipers

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

AUTO should always be turned OFF before
cleaning the windshield or driving through a
car wash.

Steering Wheel (P194)
● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.

Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside

Tailgate (P150)

● Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it at the same time.

Models without smart entry system
Models with Hands Free Access

Raise and lower your foot (in a kicking
motion) under the center of the rear
bumper to open or close the tailgate with
the smart entry remote on you.

● With all the doors unlocked, press the
tailgate release button, and lift open the
tailgate.

Quick Reference Guide

(P144)

Models with smart entry system

● Press the tailgate release button to
unlock and open the tailgate when you
have the smart entry remote on you. If
your model is equipped with a power
tailgate, you can press the power tailgate
button on the driver side control panel,
or press the remote transmitter.

Power Door Mirrors
(P196)
Quick Reference Guide

● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, move
the selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch

Power Windows (P164)
● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, open
and close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger's window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator on), each
passenger's window switch is disabled.
Indicator

Power Window Lock Button

Adjustment Switch

Window Switch

*1: Models with the smart entry system have
an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of
an ignition switch.

Climate Control System (P224)

Models without SYNC button

(ON/OFF) Button

Quick Reference Guide

● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the
button to defrost the windshield.

Fan Control Dial
Temperature Control Dial
AUTO Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
(Recirculation) Button

(MODE Control) Button

(Fresh Air) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button

Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

18 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Models with SYNC button

Audio/Information Screen
Quick Reference Guide
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
(CLIMATE) Button
Driver side Temperature
Control Dial

Passenger side Temperature
Control Dial

AUTO Button
(ON/OFF) Button
(Recirculation) Button
(Fresh Air) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button

Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.

Features

(P229)

(P233)
Models with color audio system

(+ / (- /

Button

SOURCE Button
● (+ / (- Button
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
● SOURCE Button
Press to change the audio mode: FM1/
FM2/AM/USB or iPod/Pandora®/
Bluetooth® Audio.

●

/
Button
Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
iPod, USB device, or Bluetooth® Audio:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
USB device or Bluetooth® Audio *:
Press and hold to change a folder.
Pandora®:
Press to skip to the next track. Press
and hold to select the next or
previous station.

Models with Display Audio

/
Button
3 / 4 /
(+ / (- Bar

Quick Reference Guide

Audio Remote Controls

ENTER Button
● (+ / (- Bar
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
Sliding up or down also increases or
decreases the volume.
Swipe down quickly to mute the volume
and swipe up to cancel the mute.
● 3 / 4 Button
Press 3 or 4 to cycle through the audio
mode as follows:
FM/AM/SiriusXM® */USB/iPod/
Bluetooth® Audio/Pandora® */Apps */
Audio Apps *

• When listening to the radio and
SiriusXM® *

a
b

Press ENTER to switch the display to a
preset list you stored in the preset
buttons.
Press 3 or 4 to select a preset, then
press ENTER.
* Not available on all models

Quick Reference Guide

• When listening to a USB flash drive

• When listening to Pandora® *

Press ENTER to display the folder list.

Press ENTER to display the station list.

Press 3 or 4 to select a folder.

Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then
press ENTER.

Press ENTER to display a list of tracks in
that folder.
d Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then
press ENTER.
You can also swipe up or down to scroll
through the list of tracks alphabetically.

• When listening to an iPod

a
b
c
d

Press ENTER to display the iPod music
list.
Press 3 or 4 to select a category.
Press ENTER to display a list of items in
the category.
Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then
press ENTER.

u Press ENTER and press 3 or 4
repeatedly until a desired item you
want to listen is displayed.
You can also swipe up or down to scroll
through the list of tracks alphabetically.

• When listening to Bluetooth® Audio

Press ENTER to display the track list.

Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then
press ENTER.

●

/
Button
Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
USB device:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
Pandora® *:
Press to skip to the next track.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous station.
(Display/Information) Button:
Press to change contents.
2 Driver Information
Interface *(P121)

Audio system (P230)
Models with color audio system (P237)

Quick Reference Guide

Audio/Information Screen
(Day/Night) Button

RADIO Button

(Phone) Button

MEDIA Button

(Sound) Button

VOL/

(Volume/Power) Knob
(Seek/Skip) Button

Selector Knob
MENU/CLOCK Button

(Seek/Skip) Button

(Back) Button
Preset Buttons (1-6)

* Not available on all models

Models with Display Audio (P258)

For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual
Quick Reference Guide
Driver Information Interface
*

Compass Icon *

(Home) Icon

(Map) Icon *
(Audio) Icon
(Phone) Icon

(Back) Icon

VOL/
Knob

AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio)
(Day/Night) Icon

Audio/Information Screen

(Instrument Panel) Icon

Driving

(P433)
Quick Reference Guide

Continuously Variable Transmission (P455)
● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
● Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.

Release Button

Shift Lever

Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Normal driving.
Drive (S)
● Better acceleration
● Used to increase engine braking
● Used when going up or down hills
Low
● Used to further increase engine braking
● Used when going up or down hills

Depress the brake pedal and press the
release button to move out of (P .
Press the release button to
move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.

* Not available on all models

VSA® On and Off (P495)
Quick Reference Guide

● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To partially disable or fully restore VSA®
function, press and hold the button until
you hear a beep.

Cruise Control (P461)
● Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE */
MAIN * button, then press –/SET once you
have achieved the desired speed (above
25 mph or 40 km/h).

Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P503)
● Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
● The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you start the engine.
● A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.

Collision Mitigation
Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) OFF Button *
(P520)
● When a possible collision is likely
unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to
reduce the vehicle speed and the severity
of the collision.
● To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and
hold the button until you hear a beep.

Refueling (P533)

Pull the fuel fill door
release handle.

After refueling,
wait for about five
seconds before
removing the filler
nozzle.

Quick Reference Guide

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Fuel tank capacity:14 US gal (53 L)

* Not available on all models

Honda SensingTM*
Quick Reference Guide

Honda SensingTM is a driver support system
which employs the use of two distinctly
different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor
located in the front grille and a front sensor
camera mounted to the interior side of the
windshield, behind the rear view mirror.
The camera is located
behind the rearview
mirror.
Front Sensor
Camera

Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * (P467)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and
a set following interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected
vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and
stop your vehicle, without you having to
keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.

Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM)
System * (P482)
Alerts and helps to assist you when the
system detects a possibility of your vehicle
unintentionally crossing over detected lane
markings.

Radar Sensor

The radar sensor is
inside the front grille.

Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS) * (P486)
Provides steering input to help keep the
vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the
vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Collision Mitigation
Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) * (P516)
Can assist you when there is a possibility of
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The
CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a
potential collision is determined, as well as
to reduce your vehicle speed to help
minimize collision severity when a collision is
deemed unavoidable.

Maintenance

(P539)

● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid.
● Check the battery condition monthly.

Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.

Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then
raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you
can release the lever.

Quick Reference Guide

Under the Hood (P553)
Wiper Blades (P577)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.

Tires (P581)

Lights (P570)

● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.

● Inspect all lights regularly.

When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
* Not available on all models

Handling the Unexpected
Quick Reference Guide

Flat Tire (P603)

Engine Won't Start (P610) Overheating (P617)

● Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
cargo area.

● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.

● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.

Indicators Come On

Blown Fuse (P628)

Emergency Towing (P632)

(P621)

● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.

● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.

● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.

(P601)

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

29 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

What to Do If
The ignition switch does
not turn from (0 to (q .
Why?
Canadian models

The power mode does not
change from VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) to ACCESSORY.
Why?
Models without smart entry system

●

The steering wheel may be locked.

U.S. models without smart entry system
●

Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key.

Canadian models
●

Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button.

Quick Reference Guide

U.S. models without smart entry
system

The shift lever should be moved to (P .

The ignition switch does
not turn from (q to (0 and
I cannot remove the key.
Why?
Models with smart entry system

The power mode does not
change from ACCESSORY
to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Why?

Quick Reference Guide

Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P514)

The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the
lock position. If so, open the rear
door with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, slide the
lever up to the unlock position.

Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver's door?

The beeper sounds when:
● The exterior lights are left on.
Models without smart entry system
●

The key is left in the ignition switch.

Models with smart entry system
●

The power mode is in ACCESSORY.

The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are
not wearing their seat belts.

Pressing the electric
parking brake switch does
not release the parking
brake. Why?

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.

Depressing the accelerator
pedal does not release the
parking brake
automatically. Why?

●

Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

I'm seeing an amber
indicator of a tire with an
exclamation point. What is
that?

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If
you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate
the system.

●

Quick Reference Guide

Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
Check if the transmission is in (P or (N . If so, select any other
position.

2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P503)

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

32 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions.............. 34
Important Handling Information......... 36
Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 37
Safety Checklist ................................. 38
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts ........................ 40
Fastening a Seat Belt .......................... 44
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 48
Airbags
Airbag System Components ............... 49
Types of Airbags ................................ 52

Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 52
Side Airbags....................................... 56
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 58
Airbag System Indicators.................... 60
Airbag Care ....................................... 62
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 63

Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 77

Safety of Infants and Small Children....... 65

Safety of Larger Children ................... 74
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas ....................... 76

For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.

■ Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.

■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.

■ Don't drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

35 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely

■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.

Safe Driving

Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.

■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information

Important Handling Information

Safe Driving

Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use
only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway
driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also
provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher
off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tripping
or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder,
make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.

1Important Handling Information
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover,
read:
2 Precautions While Driving P. 453
2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 444
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features

Your Vehicle's Safety Features
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features
9

6
10
7
8
10

6
7
8
9
10
11

Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.

Safe Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.

Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Seat Belt Tensioners

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist

Safety Checklist

Safe Driving

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant
from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the
tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 144

• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 197

• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraints P. 201

• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 44

• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 63

* Not available on all models

1Safety Checklist
Models with information display

If the door and/or the tailgate open indicator is on, a
door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed.
Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the
indicator goes off.
2 Door Open Indicator * P. 87
2 Tailgate Open Indicator * P. 87

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist

1Safety Checklist
Models with driver information interface

* Not available on all models

Safe Driving

If the door and/or tailgate open message appears on
the driver information interface, a door and/or the
tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and
the tailgate tightly until the message disappears.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages * P. 103

Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers

■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body.
The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 71

1About Your Seat Belts

3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
The emergency locking retractor may lock if you lean
forward too quickly. Slower movements will allow
the belt to extend fully without locking.

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Proper use of seat belts

1About Your Seat Belts

Continued

If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.

Safe Driving

Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Seat Belt Reminder
Models with information display

Safe Driving
Models with driver information
interface

1Seat Belt Reminder

The seat belt system includes an indicator on
the instrument panel to remind the driver or a
front passenger or both to fasten their seat
belts.
If the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1 and
a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound
and the indicator will blink. After a few
seconds, the beeper will stop and the
indicator will come on and remain illuminated
until the seat belt is fastened.
The beeper will periodically sound and the
indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving
until the seat belt is fastened.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound.
The indicator also may not come on and the beeper
may not sound when the occupant is not heavy
enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants
(e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved
to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will
injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 63

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

Safe Driving

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 197
Safe Driving

Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.

Buckle

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.

Latch
Plate

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

1Fastening a Seat Belt

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.

Safe Driving

Lap belt
as low as
possible

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
pulling the release outward.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.

Pull
outward

Continued

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

■ Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
1. Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and
the latch plate from each holding slot in the
ceiling.

Small Latch Plate

1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor

3 WARNING

Safe Driving

Using the seat belt with the detachable
anchor unlatched increases the chance of
serious injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt, make sure the
detachable anchor is correctly latched.

Latch Plate
Small Latch Plate

2. Line up the triangle marks on the small
latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure
the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt
to the anchor buckle.

To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch
plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.
Latch Plate

Anchor Buckle
Latch
Plate

Buckle

3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle.
Properly fasten the seat belt the same way
you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.

Small Latch Plate

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

■ Advice for Pregnant Women

Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.

Safe Driving

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.

1Advice for Pregnant Women

Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

Safe Driving

• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract
easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection

3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

49 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Airbags
Airbag System Components

Safe Driving

6
8

8
8

Continued

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

50 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Safe Driving

The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
b Two

side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

d An

electronic control unit that, when the
vehicle is on, continually monitors
information about the various impact
sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover
sensor, airbag activators, seat belt
tensioners, and other vehicle
information. During a crash event the
unit can record such information.

e Automatic

front seat belt tensioners. In
addition, the driver's and front
passenger's seat belt buckles incorporate
sensors that detect whether or not the
belts are fastened.
driver's seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.

h Impact

sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.

i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts

you that the front passenger's front
airbag has been turned off.
j An indicator on the instrument panel that

alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
kA

rollover sensor that can detect if your
vehicle is about to roll over and signal the
control unit to deploy both side curtain
airbags.

l Pressure

sensors inside each front door
that control side airbag deployment.

c Two

g Weight

sensors in the front passenger's
seat. The front passenger's airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is
approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the
weight of an infant or small child).

*1: Models with the smart entry system
have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

■ Important Facts About Your Airbags

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.

Safe Driving

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Types of Airbags

Safe Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.

1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON (w *1.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary
restraint system.

■ Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

1Front Airbags (SRS)
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether the seat belts are latched, and/or
other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition
switch.

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Operation
Safe Driving

Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

■ How the Front Airbags Work

1How the Front Airbags Work

While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.

Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

Continued

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

54 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ When front airbags should not deploy

Safe Driving

Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seatbelt or, if your vehicle
is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seatbelt and a side curtain airbag. Front
airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide
little if any protection.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Advanced Airbags

1Advanced Airbags

Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor

Based on information from this sensor and the
severity of the impact, the advanced airbag
system determines the optimal deployment of
the driver’s airbag.

The front passenger's advanced airbag system
has weight sensors.

Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors

If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver's seating position.
For the advanced airbags to work properly:
• Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
• Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
• All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
• Do not cover the passenger's side dashboard with
a cloth, towel, cover, etc.

Safe Driving

The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related
injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced airbag system includes a
seat position sensor.

We advise against allowing a child under the
age of 12 to ride in the front passenger's seat.
However, if you do allow a child under 12
to ride in the front passenger's seat, note
that the system will automatically turn off the
front passenger's airbag if the sensors detect
that the child is approximately 65 lbs (29kg) or
less.

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Safe Driving

■ Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver's and passenger's seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
Housing
Location

■ Operation
When
inflated

Side
Airbag

When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.

1Side Airbags
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger's side, the airbag
may not deploy when there is no passenger in the
front passenger seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
Side airbag deployment is controlled by a pressure
sensor inside each front door. Damage or changes to
the inside or outside of the doors may negatively
affect side airbag deployment.
Contact an authorized dealer before changing or
repairing a front door.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

57 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage

■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the
far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts absorbed
most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been
needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

Safe Driving

Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

Safe Driving

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the
outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain
airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of
partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes,
particularly rollover crashes.

■ Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.

1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag will inflate even if
there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

59 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

■ Operation
Safe Driving

The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled
frontal collision.

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the driver information interface *.
Safe Driving

■ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
Models with information
display
*

■ When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w *1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.

Models with driver information interface

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
U.S.

Canada

■ When the passenger airbag off

Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 63

If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will come on.

To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm
that:
• There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat-back.
• There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger’s seat.
• The front seat or seat-back is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
• There is no object placed under or beside the front
passenger’s seat.
• The occupant is sitting in an upright position and
the seat back is not excessively reclined.
• The occupant is not leaning against the door or
center console.
• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front
of them.
• There are no objects hanging from the front
passenger’s seat.
• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back
pocket.

Safe Driving

indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the weight sensors detect
about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an
infant or small child, on the seat.

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as
possible if:
• All of the above conditions are met, and the
indicator comes on with an adult seated in the
front passenger seat.
• The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front
seat when the indicator is on.

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
Safe Driving

■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.

■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver's seat position
sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or
modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda
dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-8889-HONDA-9.

1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.

Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver's ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.

Continued

3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

Safe Driving

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.

1Protecting Child Passengers

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat
belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
Safe Driving

• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

1Protecting Child Passengers

3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle warning came
with a label on the dashboard (U.S. models) and has
labels on the front visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 77

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safety of Infants and Small Children
■ Protecting Infants

1Protecting Infants

3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.

Safe Driving

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the
infant is at least one year old. Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for
a child up to two years old if the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rearfacing seat.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.

Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 49

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Continued

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Protecting Smaller Children
Safe Driving

If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.

1Protecting Smaller Children

3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and
weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Selecting a Child Seat

1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

Safe Driving

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.

■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Continued

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

68 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Safe Driving

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in rear seats. A child seat is attached
to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

Marks

Lower
Anchors

Rigid Type

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Flexible Type
Outer position

Tether
Strap
Hook

Safe Driving

For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child
seat that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.

Outer position

3. Put the head restraint to its upper-most
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook to the anchor.
4. Go to step 7.

Anchor
Center position

Cover

Center position

3. Put the head restraint to its upper-most
position.
4. Open the anchor cover.

Center Lower Anchor
Continued

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

70 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Center position

Safe Driving

Anchor

5. Route the tether strap through the head
restraint legs. Make sure the strap is not
twisted.
6. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
All models

Tether Strap
Hook

7. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
8. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
9. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Safe Driving

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt if it is completely retracted
it unlocks wind up into the retractor, then
try to pull it out to make sure the retractor
is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.

Continued

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

■ Adding Security with a Tether
Anchor Fitting

Tether Anchorage Points

Two tether anchorage points are provided
behind the rear outer seating positions and
one in the ceiling for the rear center.
If you have a child restraint system that comes
with a tether but can be installed with a seat
belt, the tether may be used for additional
security.

1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

73 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Tether
Strap
Hook

Anchor

Tether Strap
Hook

1. Put the head restraint to its upper-most
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
2. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.

Safe Driving

Anchor

■ Using an outer anchor

■ Using the center anchor
1. Put the head restraint to its upper-most
position.
2. Open the anchor cover.
3. Route the tether strap through the head
restraint legs.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safety of Larger Children
■ Protecting Larger Children
Safe Driving

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.

■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

1Safety of Larger Children

3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

■ Booster Seats

1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.

Safe Driving

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child's safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer's recommendations.

Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. six years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.

■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.

■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.

Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Safe Driving

■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate
open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the
mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

77 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

Sun Visor
U.S. models

Canadian models

Safe Driving

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.

Sun Visor
U.S. models only

Dashboard
U.S. models only

Air Conditioner System
U.S. models

Canadian models

Radiator Cap

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

78 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators
Information Display Warning and
Information Messages * .................. 102
Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages * .................. 103
Gauges and Displays
Gauges............................................ 117
Information Display * ........................ 118
Driver Information Interface * ........... 121

* Not available on all models

Indicators

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Instrument Panel

●

U.S.

Canada

Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Red)

●

(Red)
●

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off if the parking
brake has been released.
Comes on when the parking brake
is applied, and goes off when it is
released.
Comes on when the brake fluid
level is low.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the brake system.
The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if you drive
with the parking brake not fully
released.
Comes on for about 15 seconds
when you pull the electric parking
brake switch while the ignition
switch is in LOCK (0 *1.
Stays on for about 15 seconds
when you turn the ignition switch
to LOCK (0 *1 while the electric
parking brake is set.

Explanation
●

Comes on while driving - Make sure
the parking brake is released. Check the
brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator
comes on while driving P. 623

●

Comes on along with the brake
system indicator (amber) Immediately stop in a safe place. Contact
a dealer for repair. The brake pedal
becomes harder to operate. Depress the
pedal further than you normally do.
Comes on along with the ABS
indicator - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On or Blinks P. 623

●

Blinks and the brake system indicator
(amber) comes on at the same time There is a problem with the electric
parking brake system. The parking brake
may not be set.
Avoid using the parking brake and have
your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On or Blinks at the Same
Time When the Brake System
Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 624

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

Message *

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

U.S.

Canada

Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Amber)

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with a system related to braking
other than the conventional brake
system.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the electric parking brake
system or the automatic brake
hold system.

●

Comes on if there is a problem
with the radar sensor.
Indicator may come on temporarily
when the Maximum Load Limit is
exceeded.

●

Make sure the total load is within the
Maximum Load Limit.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Comes on while driving - Avoid using
the parking brake and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.

Message *
U.S.

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

Canada

(Amber)

●

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 437

—

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Automatic Brake
Hold System
Indicator
Instrument Panel

U.S.

Canada

●

Automatic Brake
Hold Indicator

●

Low Oil Pressure
Indicator

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when the automatic
brake hold system is on.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 512

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when the automatic
brake hold is activated.

Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and
goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil
pressure is low.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 512

●

Comes on while driving - Immediately
stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes On P. 621

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message *

—

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control
systems.

●

Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place where there are no flammable
objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes
or more, and wait for it to cool down.
Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.

Message *

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 642

●

Instrument Panel

Malfunction
Indicator Lamp

Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and
goes off when the engine starts, or
after several seconds if the engine
did not start. If “readiness codes”
have not been set, it blinks five
times before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the
engine's cylinders is detected.

Explanation

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 622
●

Charging System
Indicator

Shift Lever
Position
Indicator

●

Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and
goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not
charging.
Indicates the current shift lever
position.

●

Comes on while driving - Turn off the
climate control system and rear defogger
in order to reduce electricity
consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 621

2 Shifting P. 455

—

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Transmission
Indicator

●

Instrument Panel

●

Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator

●

Low Fuel
Indicator

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Blinks if the transmission system
has a problem.

●

Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
starts and acceleration and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Comes on and the beeper sounds
if you are not wearing a seat belt
when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w *1.
If the front passenger is not
wearing a seat belt, the indicator
comes on a few seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or
the front passenger has not
fastened a seat belt. The beeper
sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.

●

The beeper stops and the indicator goes
off when you and the front passenger
fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front
passenger has fastened the seat belt
- A detection error may have occurred in
the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.

Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 2.1
U.S. gal/8.0 liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with
the fuel gauge.

●

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 42

●

Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon
as possible.
Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message *

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator

●

Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time,
there is a problem with the ABS.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of
the following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner

●

Message *

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. With this indicator
on, your vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 514

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

Stays on constantly or does not come
on at all - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Instrument Panel

Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
System Indicator

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the VSA® system or hill start
assist system.

●

Comes on if the VSA® system is
deactivated temporarily after the
battery has been disconnected,
then re-connected.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
System P. 494

Drive a short distance at more than 12
mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
off. If it does not, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message *

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Door Open
Indicator *

2 VSA® On and Off P. 495

●

Comes on if the VSA® system is
deactivated temporarily after the
battery has been disconnected,
then re-connected.

●

Drive a short distance at more than 12
mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
off. If it does not, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

●

Comes on for a few seconds if you
turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if any door is not
completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if any door is
opened while driving.

●

Goes off when all doors are closed.

Comes on for a few seconds if you
turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if the tailgate is not
completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if tailgate is
opened while driving.

●

Tailgate Open
Indicator *

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you partially
disable VSA®.

●

Message *

Instrument Panel

Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
OFF Indicator

●

Explanation

—

Goes off when the tailgate is closed.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

—

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator
Instrument Panel

●

Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and
goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the EPS system.

Explanation
●

Stays on constantly or does not come
on at all - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System Indicator Comes On P. 625

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message *

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation
●

●

Blinks for about one minute, and
then stays on if there is a problem
with the TPMS, or when a compact
spare tire is temporarily installed.

●

Blinks and remains on - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle
is fitted with a compact spare, get your
regular tire repaired or replaced, and put
back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

●

Comes on if the TPMS is
deactivated temporarily after the
battery has been disconnected,
then re-connected.

●

Drive a short distance at more than 12
mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
off. If it does not, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

●

Low Tire
Pressure/TPMS
Indicator

●

Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe
place, check tire pressures, and inflate the
tire(s) if necessary.
Stays on after the tires are inflated to
the recommended pressures - The
system needs to be calibrated.

Instrument Panel

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
May come on briefly if the ignition
switch is turned to ON (w *1 and
the vehicle is not moved within 45
seconds, to indicate the calibration
process is not yet complete.
Comes on and stays on when:
- One or more tires’ pressures are
determined to be significantly
low.
- The system has not been
calibrated.

●

Message *

2 TPMS Calibration P. 503

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Instrument Panel

System Message
Indicator *

●

Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
High Beam
Indicator
Auto High-beam
System Indicator *

●

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on along with a beep
when a problem is detected. A
system message on the driver
information interface appears at
the same time.

●

Blink when you operate the turn
signal lever.
Blinks along with all turn signals
when you press the hazard
warning button.

●

Comes on when the high beam
headlights are on.

●

Comes on when all the operating
conditions of the Auto high-beam
system are met.

●

Lights On
Indicator

Explanation

Comes on whenever the light
switch is on, or in AUTO * when
the exterior lights are on.

●

While the indicator is on, press the
(display/information) button to see the
message again.
Refer to the Indicators information in this
chapter when a system message appears
on the driver information interface. Take
the appropriate action for the message.
The driver information interface does not
return to the normal screen unless the
warning is canceled, or the
button
is pressed.

* Not available on all models

—

Does not blink or blinks rapidly
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 574

—

●

—

2 Auto High-Beam System * P. 181

—

If you remove the key from the ignition
switch*1 while the exterior lights are on, a
chime sounds when the driver's door is
opened.

—

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Message *

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

91 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name
Fog Light
Indicator *

On/Blinking
●

●

Comes on when the fog lights are
on.
●

●

Indicator

Immobilizer
System Indicator

●

Message *

—

Blinks - You cannot start the engine.
Depress the brake pedal, then turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Pull the key
out*2, and then insert the key and turn it
to ON (w *1 again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add
other devices to it. Electrical problems can
occur.

Models without
smart entry system

Instrument Panel

Blinks if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key
information.

Explanation

Models with smart
entry system

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the ignition on.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Instrument Panel

Indicator

●

Blind spot
information (BSI)
Indicator *

●

Message *

2 Security System Alarm * P. 161

—

Blinks when the security system
alarm has been set.

Security System
Alarm Indicator

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Stays on while BSI is turned off.

—

Comes on when mud, snow, or ice
accumulates in the vicinity of
sensor.

●

Comes on if there is a problem
with the system.

●

Comes on while driving - Remove the
obstacle in the vicinity of sensor.
2 Blind spot information (BSI) System *
P. 497

Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the ignition on.

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name
ECON Mode
Indicator

CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator *

●

Maintenance
Minder
Indicator *
Transmission
Temperature
Indicator *

●

Power Reduced
Indicator *

Explanation

Message *

Comes on when you press the
ECON button.

2 ECON Button P. 457

Comes on when you press the
CRUISE button.

2 Cruise Control * P. 461

—

Comes on if you have set a speed
for cruise control.

2 Cruise Control * P. 461

—

2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 543

—

Stop in a safe place and move the shift
position to (P .

—

Comes on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when the scheduled
maintenance is due soon.
Comes on when the transmission
fluid temperature is too high.

●

Comes on if there is a problem
with the shutter grill, and the
radiator coolant temperature is
too high.

●

Power output will be reduced, so you may
not be able to accelerate or maintain your
current speed. Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.

Instrument Panel

CRUISE MAIN
Indicator *

On/Blinking

—

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.

Explanation
●

Instrument Panel

Brake
Depressing
Indicator *

●

—

Blinks when the electric parking
brake switch is pressed without
depressing the brake pedal while
the electric parking brake is in
operation.

Automatic Brake Hold System
●

Blinks while driving - Press the electric
parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
2 Parking Brake P. 508

Electric Parking Brake System
●

Blinks when the automatic brake
hold button is pressed without
depressing the brake pedal while
the automatic brake hold is in
operation.
Blinks if the automatic brake hold
is automatically canceled while it
is in operation. The beeper
sounds.

●

Blinks while driving - Press the
automatic brake hold button with the
brake pedal depressed.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 512

—
●

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message *

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Message *

Stays on constantly - The engine drives
the front wheels only in this state. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

—

Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place, change to (P , and idle the engine
until the indicator goes off. If the indicator
does not stop blinking, take your vehicle
to a dealer.

Instrument Panel

All-wheel drive
(AWD)
Indicator *

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the AWD system.
Blinks when the differential
temperature is too high.

Explanation

—

2 Real Time AWD with Intelligent
Control SystemTM * P. 502
●

●

Road Departure
Mitigation
(RDM) Indicator *

Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the RDM system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

Comes on when the RDM system - Indicator may come on temporarily when
shuts itself off.
passing through an enclosed space, such as
tunnel.
- The area around the radar sensor is blocked
by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator does not go off even after
you cleaned the radar sensor.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking
SystemTM (CMBSTM) * P. 516

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Comes on when the RDM system
shuts itself off.

Explanation
●

Message *

Instrument Panel

Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high.
Use the climate control system to cool
down the camera.
The system activates when the
temperature inside the camera cools
down.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 465

●

Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM)
Indicator *

●

Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with
a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator and message come back on
after you cleaned the area around the
camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 465

●

* Not available on all models

Comes on if there is a problem
with the RDM system.
Indicator may come on
temporarily when the Maximum
Load Limit is exceeded.

●

Make sure the total load is within the
Maximum Load Limit.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 437

—

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
Indicator
(Amber) *

●

* Not available on all models

Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with ACC with LSF.

●

Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on if anything covers the
radar sensor cover and prevents
the sensor from detecting a
vehicle in front.
May come on when driving in bad
weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
ACC with LSF has been
automatically canceled.

●

When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop
your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off
dirt using a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator does not go off even after
you clean the sensor cover.

Comes on if there is a problem
with ACC with LSF.
Indicator may come on
temporarily when Maximum Load
Limit is exceeded.
ACC with LSF has been
automatically canceled.

●

Make sure the total load is within the
Maximum Load Limit.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

●

Message *

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 437

—

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

Instrument Panel

Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
Indicator
(Green) *

Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Amber) *

* Not available on all models

On/Blinking

Explanation

●

Comes on when you press the
MAIN button.

●

Comes on when ACC with LSF is
in operation, but the temperature
inside the front sensor camera is
too high. ACC with LSF cancels
automatically. The beeper sounds
simultaneously.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the LKAS.

●

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow (LSF) * P. 467

●

Use the climate control system to cool
down the camera.
Goes off - The camera has been cooled
down. Pressing the MAIN button can
resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 465
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow (LSF) * P. 467

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

Message *
—

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name
●

Comes on when you press the
MAIN button.

●

Comes on when the LKAS is in
operation, or the LKAS button is
pressed, but the temperature
inside the front sensor camera is
too high. The LKAS cancels
automatically. The beeper sounds
simultaneously.

●

Comes on when the area around
the camera is blocked by dirt,
mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a
safe place, and wipe it off with a
soft cloth.
May come on when driving in bad
weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)

●

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator and message come back on
after you cleaned the area around the
camera.

Comes on for a few seconds
when you set the power mode to
ON, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate
the CMBSTM. A driver information
interface message appears for
five seconds.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the CMBSTM.

●

Stays on constantly without the
CMBSTM off - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.

●

Collision
Mitigation
Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM)
Indicator *

●

* Not available on all models

Explanation
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
P. 486

●

Message *
—

Use the climate control system to cool
down the camera.
Goes off - The camera has cooled down
and the system is working normally.

Instrument Panel

Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Green) *

On/Blinking

2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 465

2 Collision Mitigation Braking
SystemTM (CMBSTM) * P. 516

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

Instrument Panel

Collision
Mitigation
Braking
SystemTM
(CMBSTM)
Indicator *

On/Blinking

Explanation

●

Comes on if the CMBSTM is
deactivated temporarily after the
battery has been disconnected,
then re-connected.

●

Drive a short distance at more than 12
mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
off. If it does not, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

●

Comes on when the CMBSTM
system shuts itself off.

●

Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with
a soft cloth.

●

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator does not go off even after
you cleaned the camera.

2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 465

2 Collision Mitigation Braking
SystemTM (CMBSTM) * P. 516
●

Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high. Use the climate control
system to cool down the camera. The
system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 465

100

* Not available on all models

Message *

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Comes on when the CMBSTM
system shuts itself off.

Indicator may come on temporarily when
passing through an enclosed space, such
as tunnel.
- The area around the radar sensor is blocked
by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator does not go off even after
you clean the sensor cover.
●

2 Collision Mitigation Braking
SystemTM (CMBSTM) * P. 516
●

●

* Not available on all models

Message *

Instrument Panel

Collision
Mitigation
Braking
SystemTM
(CMBSTM)
Indicator *

Explanation

Comes on if there is a problem
with the CMBSTM.
Indicator may come on
temporarily when the Maximum
Load Limit is exceeded.

●

Make sure the total load is within the
Maximum Load Limit.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 437

—

101

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

102 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages *

Information Display Warning and Information Messages *
The following messages appear only on the information display.
Message

Condition
●

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.

Instrument Panel

102

* Not available on all models

Explanation
●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *
The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the
again with the system message indicator on.
Message

Condition

Explanation
●

Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed.

●

Appears if there is a problem with the shutter grill,
and the radiator coolant temperature is too high.

●

Power output will be reduced, so you may not be able to
accelerate or maintain your current speed. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.

●

Appears when the washer fluid gets low.

●

Refill the washer fluid.

●

Instrument Panel

Appears if any door or the tailgate is not completely
closed.
Appears if any door or the tailgate is opened while
driving. The beeper sounds.

●

Canadian models

(display/information) button to see the message

2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 569

●

Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due
soon.
Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and
Maintenance Past Due follow.

* Not available on all models

2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver
Information Interface P. 549

Continued

103

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Message

Condition
●

Explanation

Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
abnormally high.

2 Overheating P. 617

Instrument Panel

●

Appears when you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1 without fastening the driver's seat belt.

●

Fasten the seat belt properly before you start to drive.

●

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.

●

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears along with the battery charging system
indicator when the battery is not charging.

●

2 Checking the Battery P. 590

Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger to
reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 621

●

Appears if the automatic brake hold is automatically
canceled while it is in operation.

●

Appears when the automatic brake hold system is
turned off.

●

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 512

Appears when the automatic brake hold button is
pressed without wearing the driver’s seat belt.

●

Appears when the automatic brake hold button is
pressed without depressing the brake pedal while
the automatic brake hold is in operation.

●

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 512

Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 512

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

104

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Message

Condition

Explanation

●

Appears when the parking brake is applied
automatically while it is in operation.

●

Appears when the electric parking brake switch is
pressed without depressing the brake pedal while
the electric parking brake is in operation.

●

Appears if there is something wrong with the vehicle
while you are driving.

●
●

Immediately stop in a safe place.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears if the shift position cannot be changed to
(P due to a problem with the vehicle.

●

Apply the parking brake once you have stopped.

●

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

●

Appears while driving - Press the electric parking
brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.
2 Parking Brake P. 508

Instrument Panel

●

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 512
2 Parking Brake P. 508

2 Parking Brake P. 508

Continued

105

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models without smart entry system

Message

Condition

Instrument Panel

●

Appears when you open the driver’s door while the
ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q .

●

Appears when the ignition key is turned to
ACCESSORY (q from ON (w . (The driver's door is
closed.)

●

Appears when you open the driver’s door while the
ignition key is in LOCK (0 .

Explanation
●

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 , then remove the
key.

—
●

Remove the key from the ignition switch.

Models with smart entry system

Message

Condition
●

●

106

Explanation

Appears after you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or ON.
Appears when the steering wheel is locked.

2 Starting the Engine P. 448

●

Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button.

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Message

Condition
●

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP
button to turn the engine off without the shift lever
in (P .

Explanation
U.S. models
●

Move the shift lever to (P . The power mode changes to
VEHICLE OFF.

Canadian models

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP
button and the parking brake is not activated or the
shift lever is not in (N position.

●

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Move the shift lever to (P , then press the ENGINE
START/STOP button twice.

●

Move the shift lever to (P position and start the engine.

Instrument Panel

●

—
●

Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the
power mode is in ACCESSORY.

●

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your
foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

●

Appears when you close the door with the power
mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside
the vehicle.

●

Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back
inside the vehicle and close the door.

Appears when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak.

●

2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 174

Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 592

Continued

107

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Message

Condition
Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too
weak to start the engine or the key is not within
operating range to start the engine.
A beeper sounds six times.

●

Appears when the starter system has a problem.

●

As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing
the brake pedal and manually start the engine.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

●

Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the
smart entry system or push button starting system.

●

Appears constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.

●

Appears if the vehicle is being driven in a manner
consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving.

●

Instrument Panel

U.S.

Explanation
Bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE
START/STOP button to be touched with.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 611

Canada

2 Driver Attention Monitor P. 125

108

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

109 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with LED headlight

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the light control
system.

●

Appears while driving - Manually turn the lights on,
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

●

Appears if there is a problem with the headlights.

●

Appears while driving - The headlights may not be on.
When conditions allow you to drive safely, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Continued

Instrument Panel

●

109

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with ACC with LSF

Message

Condition
●

●

You can resume the set speed after the condition that
caused ACC with LSF to cancel improves. Press the RES/
+ button.

Instrument Panel

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467
●

●

110

Appears when ACC with LSF has been
automatically canceled.

Explanation

Appears when the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead of you is too close while ACC
with LSF is in operation.

●

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you is too close.

●

Appears when the driver’s seat belt is unfastened
while your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC
with LSF.

●

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

●

* Not available on all models

ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467

ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467

ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467

ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with ACC with LSF

Message

Condition
●

●

Appears when the vehicle in front of you starts
moving while your vehicle is stopped automatically
by ACC with LSF.

●

Appears when the shift lever is moved into any
position other than (D or (S while ACC with LSF is
in operation.

●

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
shift lever is in any position other than (D or (S .

●

Appears when the vehicle is stopped on a very steep
slope while ACC with LSF is in operation.

●

* Not available on all models

Either press the RES/+ button or –/SET button, or
depress the accelerator pedal.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467

ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467

ACC with LSF cannot be set.

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467

ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467

Continued

111

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with ACC with LSF

Message

Condition
●

Instrument Panel

●

112

Explanation

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.

●

Appears when the parking brake is applied
automatically while ACC with LSF is in operation.

●

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
parking brake is applied.

●

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is depressed.

●

Appears if ACC with LSF is canceled while your
vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC with LSF.

●

* Not available on all models

ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467

ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467
2 Parking Brake P. 508

ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467
2 Parking Brake P. 508

ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with ACC with LSF

Message

Condition
●

Flashes when the system senses a likely collision
with a vehicle in front of you.

Explanation
●

Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply
the brakes, change lanes, etc.)

* Not available on all models

Continued

Instrument Panel

2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
P. 516
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 467

113

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with LKAS

Message

Condition
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
●

●

Instrument Panel

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
lane.

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * P. 482

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
line. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
●

Explanation

●

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.

●

You can change the setting for the road departure
mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only
can be selected.

2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * P. 482

When you selected Warning Only

- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

2 Customized Features P. 337

When you selected Normal or Wide

- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system
also steers the vehicle to help you remain within
your driving lane.
●

114

Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper
sounds simultaneously.

* Not available on all models

●

Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with remote engine starter

Message

Condition
●

Explanation

Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s
door while the engine is running by remote engine
start.

2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback * P. 450
Instrument Panel

Models with power tail gate

Message
U.S.

Condition
●

Appears when there is a problem with the power
tailgate system.

Explanation
●
●

Manually open or close the power tailgate.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Canada

Models with Auto high-beam system

Message

Condition
●

●

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the Auto highbeam system.

●

Appears when the area around the camera on the
windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, etc.

●

* Not available on all models

Manually operate the headlight switch.
If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when
this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a
soft cloth.
If the message does not disappear after cleaning the lens,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Continued

115

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with All-wheel drive (AWD)

Message

Instrument Panel

116

Condition

Explanation

●

Appears if there is a problem with the AWD system.

●

The engine drives the front wheels only in this state. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

●

Appears when the differential temperature is too
high.

●

Stop in a safe place, change to (P , and idle the engine
until the message disappears. If the message does not
disappear, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM *
P. 502

* Not available on all models

Gauges and Displays
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

1Gauges
Models with information display

Press and hold the mile (U.S.)/km (Canada) change
knob until you hear a beep. The speedometer reading
and the displayed measurements switch between
mph (U.S.) and /h (Canada).

Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).

■ Tachometer
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

■ Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Models with driver information interface

Press the
(display/information) button
repeatedly until the
icon is shown on the driver
information interface. Press ENTER, then press and
hold it again. The speedometer reading and the
displayed measurements will switch between mph
(U.S.) and km/h (Canada).

Instrument Panel

■ Speedometer

1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.

■ Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 617

117

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display *

Information Display *
The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and
maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.

■ Switching the Display
Press the

Each time you press the
knob, the information
display changes as follows:
Instant Fuel Economy,
Odometer, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature

(TRIP) knob to change the display.

Instrument Panel

Instant Fuel Economy,
Range, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature

(TRIP) knob

■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.

■ Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

118

1Switching the Display

* Not available on all models

Instant Fuel Economy, Average
Fuel Economy A, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature

Instant Fuel Economy, Average
Fuel Economy B, Trip Meter B,
Outside Temperature

Engine Oil Life

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display *

■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the
reset to 0.0.

knob. The trip meter is

■ Average Fuel Economy

1Average Fuel Economy

■ Instant Fuel Economy Gauge

Press and hold the mile (U.S.)/km (Canada) change
knob to switch the measurement.

1Instant Fuel Economy Gauge
Press and hold the mile (U.S.)/km (Canada) change
knob to switch the measurement.

Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100km.

Instrument Panel

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km.
The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel
economy is also reset.

■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 543

■ Range

1Range

Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.

Continued

Press and hold the mile (U.S.)/km (Canada) change
knob to switch the measurement.

119

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display *

■ Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

■ Adjusting the outside temperature indicator
Instrument Panel

Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press and hold the
(TRIP) knob for 10 seconds or more while the outside
temperature is shown on the information display.
u The information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display
starts showing from -5°F to +5°F (U.S.) or -3°C to +3°C (Canada).
3. Release the
knob when the right adjustment amount is shown.
u The adjustment is complete.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

120

1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

121 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

Driver Information Interface *
The driver information interface shows the odometer, trip meter, outside
temperature indicator, and other gauges.
It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.

■ Switching the Display
Press the
(display/information) button and press
display. Press ENTER to see detailed information.

Range &
Fuel

Instrument Panel

■ Main displays
to change the

Average Speed
& Elapsed Time
Optional
Contents *

Turn by Turn
Directions * &
Compass *

Driver Attention
Monitor

AWD Torque
Distribution
Monitor *

Phone

Audio

Maintenance
MinderTM

(Display/
Information)
Button
Press
or
.

Press ENTER.

* Not available on all models

Warning
Messages
Speed Unit & Disp OFF

Continued

121

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ Trip computer
Press the

(TRIP) knob to change the display.

Instrument Panel

Odometer
Outside temperature

Trip A

Trip B

(TRIP)
Knob

■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.
1Trip Meter

■ Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

122

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the
knob, or by using the customized
features on the audio/information display.
2 Customized Features P. 337

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

123 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ Resetting a trip meter

To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the
reset to 0.0.

knob. The trip meter is

Instrument Panel

Continued

123

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km.
The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel
economy is also reset.

You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Customized Features P. 337

Instrument Panel

■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.

■ Elapsed Time
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

■ Average Speed
Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since Trip A or Trip B was
reset.

■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 543

124

1Average Fuel Economy

1Elapsed Time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2 Customized Features P. 337
1Average Speed
You can change when to reset the average speed.
2 Customized Features P. 337

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ Driver Attention Monitor

1Driver Attention Monitor

The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is
being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it
determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the
degree of the driver's attention in the Driver Information Interface.
Driver Information
Interface

Instrument Panel

ENTER

The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if
the driver is tired or inattentive.
Regardless of the system's feedback, if you are
feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as
long as needed.

(Display/
Information)
Button

When the
(display/information) button
is pressed, bars in the Driver Information
Interface light up in white to indicate the
degree of the driver's attention.
2 Switching the Display P. 118
Level

Continued

125

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

126 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

If two bars light up, the Driver Attention
Level Low message will appear.

Instrument Panel

If one bar lights up, the Driver Attention
Level Low. Time For A Break message will
appear, a beep will sound, and the steering
wheel will vibrate.
If this message appears, stop in a safe location
and rest for as long as needed.
The message will disappear when the ENTER
button is pressed or when the system has
determined that the driver is driving normally.
If the driver does not take a break and the
monitor continues to detect that the driver is
very tired, the message will appear again after
approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a
beep and steering wheel vibrations.
The message does not appear when the
traveling time is 30 minutes or less.

■ The Driver Attention Monitor resets when
• the engine is turned off.
• the driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.

126

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ For the Driver Attention Monitor to function

1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function

• the vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h).
• the electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.

The bars in the Driver Information Interface remain
grayed out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is
functioning.

■ Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * P. 486

• the condition of the road is poor, e.g. the surface is unpaved or bumpy.
• it is windy.
• the driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner such as
changing lanes or accelerating.

Instrument Panel

Monitor may not function in the following circumstances.
• the steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * is active.

■ Customizing
You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile And Audible
Alert, Tactile Alert, or OFF.
2 Customized Features P. 337

* Not available on all models

Continued

127

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ Outside Temperature

1Outside Temperature

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

■ Adjusting the outside temperature display
Instrument Panel

Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
Use the driver information interface's * or audio/information display's * customized
features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 337

■ Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

■ AWD Torque Distribution Monitor *
The indicators on the display show the
amount of torque being transferred to the
right front, left front, right rear, and left rear
wheels.

128

* Not available on all models

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ Turn-by-Turn Directions *
Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the
navigation system.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

Show the current audio information.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 258

■ Phone

The driver information interface shows a compass
when the route guidance is not used.
You can select whether the turn-by-turn display
comes on during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 337

Instrument Panel

■ Audio

1Turn-by-Turn Directions *

Show the current phone information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 373

* Not available on all models

129

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

130

130 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock .................................................. 132
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 134
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*...136
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 137
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ...144
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 145
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 146
Customizing the Auto Door Locking/
Unlocking Setting........................... 147
Opening and Closing the Tailgate... 150
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 161

* Not available on all models

Security System Alarm * .................... 161
Opening and Closing the Windows .... 164
*

Moonroof .............................................. 167
Panoramic Roof*1 .................................... 168
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch * ............................... 171
ENGINE START/STOP Button * ........... 172
Ignition Switch and Power Mode
Comparison ................................... 175
Turn Signals ..................................... 176
Light Switches.................................. 177
Fog Lights * ...................................... 180
Auto High-Beam System * ................ 181
Daytime Running Lights ................... 184

Wipers and Washers ........................ 185
Brightness Control ........................... 188
Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * ........ 190
Driving Position Memory System * .... 192
Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 194
Adjusting the Mirrors....................... 195
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 197
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items .. 206
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 224
Synchronized Mode * ....................... 227
Automatic Climate Control Sensors ......228

(*1: Canadian models only, if equipped)

131

Clock
Adjusting the Clock
Models without navigation system

1Adjusting the Clock

You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch in ON (w *1.

Models with Display Audio

The clock is automatically updated through the audio
system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.

■ Adjusting the Time
Models with color audio system

■ Using the MENU/CLOCK button

Controls

1. Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button.
u Adjust Clock is selected.
2. Rotate
to change hour, then press .
3. Rotate
to change minute, then press
.
4. To enter the selection, rotate
and select
Set, then press .

Models with driver information interface

You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 337
Models with Display Audio
Models with information display

You cannot adjust the time while the vehicle is
moving.

1Using the MENU/CLOCK button
Models with color audio system

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

132

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock

Models with Display Audio

■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/
information screen
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Clock.
3. Select Clock Adjustment.
4. Select 3 or 4 to change hour.
5. Select 3 or 4 to change minute, then
select OK.

1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
Models with Display Audio

You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 337
You can turn the clock display on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 337

Controls

The clock is automatically updated when your
smartphone is connected to the audio system.
You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock
displayed on the upper right corner of the display.
1. Touch the clock on the display for a few seconds.
2. Select Clock Adjustment.
3. Select 3 or 4 to change hour.
4. Select 3 or 4 to change minute, then select OK.

133

Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following key:

■ Keys
Ignition Keys with Remote
Transmitter *

Smart Entry Remote *

Controls

Use the key to start and stop the engine, and to lock and unlock the doors and
tailgate. You can also lock and unlock the doors and tailgate pressing the buttons
on remote transmitter.

1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 161
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
Models with remote engine starter

You can remotely start the engine using the one-way
smart entry remote.
2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle
Feedback * P. 450

134

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions

■ Smart entry remote *
Built-in Key

■ Valet Key *
Gray

* Not available on all models

1Valet Key *

Can be used to start and stop the engine, and
lock and unlock driver's door.

Continued

Controls

Release Knob

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, slide the release
knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall
the built-in key, push the built-in key into the
smart entry remote until it clicks.

When you need to leave a key with a third party,
leave the valet key.

135

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *

■ Key Number Tag

1Key Number Tag

Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.

Controls

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/
unlocking the doors, opening the tailgate, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the tailgate, or starting
the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.

136

* Not available on all models

1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
Communication between the smart entry remote and
the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior light comes on when you unlock
the doors and tailgate.
No doors opened: The light fades out after 30
seconds.
Doors and tailgate relocked: The light goes off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 206
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

Door Lock
Button

■ Locking the doors and tailgate
Touch the door lock sensor on the front door
or press the lock button on the tailgate.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors and tailgate lock;
and the security system sets.

If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30
seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the smart entry
system, the doors and tailgate will automatically
relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 337

Controls

When you carry the smart entry remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors and open the
tailgate.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door
handle. You can open the tailgate within
about 32 inches (80 cm) radius from the
tailgate release button.

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

You can lock or unlock doors using the smart entry
system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

Door Lock
Button

* Not available on all models

Continued

137

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto

Controls

138

The activation range of
the auto lock function is
about 8 feet (2.5 m)

lock)
When you walk away from the vehicle while
carrying the smart entry remote, the doors will
automatically lock.
The auto lock function activates when all
doors are closed, and the smart entry remote
is within about 8 feet (2.5 m) radius of the
outside door handle.
Exit vehicle while carrying smart entry remote
and close door(s).
1. While within about 8 feet (2.5 m) radius of
the vehicle.
u The beeper sounds; the auto lock
function will be activated.
2. Carry the smart entry remote beyond about
5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain
outside this range for 2 or more seconds.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors will then lock.

1Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock)
The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory
default setting. The auto lock function can be set to
ON using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 337
After the auto lock function has been activated,
when you stay within the locking/unlocking
operation range, the indicator on the smart entry
remote will continue to flash until the doors are
locked.
When you stay beside the vehicle within the
operation range, the doors will automatically lock
approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock
function activating beeper sounds.
When you open a door after the auto lock function
activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will
be canceled.
When all doors have been closed and the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle, or if the smart entry
remote is not detected within about 8 feet (2.5 m) of
the vehicle, auto lock function will not be activated.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

To temporarily deactivate the function:
1. Set the power mode to OFF.
2. Open the driver’s door.
3. Using the master door lock switch, operate
the lock as follows:
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock.
u The beeper sounds and the function is
deactivated.

Continued

The auto lock function does not operate when any of
the following conditions are met.
• The smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.
• A door or the hood is not closed.
• The power mode is set to any mode other than
OFF.
• The smart entry remote is not located within a
radius of about 8 feet (2.5 m) from the vehicle
when you get out of the vehicle and close the
doors.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper
After the auto lock function has been activated, the
auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for
approximately two seconds in the following cases.
• The smart entry remote is put inside the vehicle
through a window.
• You are located too close to the vehicle.
• The smart entry remote is put inside the tailgate.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are
carrying the smart entry remote. Then, open/close a
door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper
sounds once.

Controls

To restore the function:
• Set the power mode to ON.
• Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock
function.
• Walk away at least more than about 8 feet
(2.5 m) away from the vehicle while
carrying the smart entry remote.

1Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock)

139

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Unlocking the doors and tailgate

Controls

Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
u All the doors and tailgate unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the tailgate release button:
u The tailgate unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.

• Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
•
•

•

2 Using the Tailgate Release Button
P. 159
Release Button

•

•
•

140

* Not available on all models

you can lock/unlock the doors and tailgate while
someone else with the remote is within range.
The door may be locked or unlocked if the door
handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a
car wash if the smart entry remote is within range.
If you grip a front door handle or touch a door lock
sensor wearing gloves, the door sensor may be
slow to respond or may not respond by locking or
unlocking the doors.
After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds
during which you can pull the door handle to
confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to
unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait
at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle,
otherwise the door will not unlock.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart
entry remote if it is above or below the outside
handle.
The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.
The light flashes, and beeper sounds and unlock
settings can be customized on the audio/
information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 337

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Using the Remote Transmitter
Ignition keys with remote transmitter

LED
Lock
Button

Unlock
Button

LED
Unlock
Button

Lock
Button

■ Locking the doors
Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors
and tailgate lock, and the security system
sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.

■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the
driver's door unlocks.
Twice:
u The remaining doors and tailgate unlock.

If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30
seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote
transmitter, the doors and tailgate will automatically
relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 337
The remote transmitter will not work when:
Ignition keys with remote transmitter

• The key is in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry remote

• The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF.

Controls

Models with smart entry remote

1Using the Remote Transmitter

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 592
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 337

Continued

141

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
If the smart entry remote battery or the vehicle battery is dead, use the key instead
of the keyless remote.
Fully insert the key and turn it.

When you lock the driver's door with a key, all the
other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When
unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the
key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the
remaining doors and the tailgate.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 337

Lock
Controls

142

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

Unlock

Unlocking the doors with the key causes the security
system to alarm. Always unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key
■ Locking the driver's door
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.

■ Locking the passenger's doors

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door, all the other doors
and tailgate lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand when you
lock the driver's door, any of the other doors or the
tailgate, otherwise you may end up locking the key
inside the vehicle.

Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
Controls

■ Lockout prevention system
Ignition keys with remote transmitter

The doors and tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry remote

The doors and tailgate cannot be locked when the smart entry remote is inside the
vehicle.

143

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Using the Lock Tab
To Lock

Lock Tab

1Using the Lock Tab

■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.

■ Unlocking a door
To Unlock

Pull the lock tab rearward.

Controls

■ Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

Inner
Handle

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, all of the other doors and tailgate lock
at the same time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.

Pull the front door inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.

1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However, this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 145

144

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.
To Lock

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver’s door using the
master door lock switch, all the other doors and the
tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.
The front passenger’s door also has the master door
lock switch.

To Unlock
Controls

Master Door
Lock Switch

Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.

■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.

1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.

■ When opening the door
Unlock

Open the door using the outside door handle.

Lock

145

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the all doors automatically when a certain
condition is met.

■ Auto Door Locking
■ Drive lock mode

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock
switch.
2 Customizing the Auto Door Locking/
Unlocking Setting P. 147

All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
Models with Display Audio

■ Auto Door Unlocking
Controls

146

■ Driver’s door open mode

All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the audio/
information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 337

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

147 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting

Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting
You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch.

■ List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options
■ Auto door locking
Mode

Description
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

Off

The auto door locking is deactivated all the time.

Controls

Drive Lock Mode*1

■ Auto door unlocking
Mode

Description

Driver’s Door Open
Mode*1

All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

Park Unlock Mode

All doors unlock when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.

Off

The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time.

*1:Default setting

Continued

147

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

148 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting

■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options
Steps

Drive Lock Mode*2

Controls

Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to (P .

Close the driver’s door.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .

Move the shift lever out of (P with the brake pedal depressed.

Off

Open the driver’s door.
*1

—

Press and hold the right side of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door
for more than five seconds. Release the switch after you hear a click twice.
Press and hold the right side of the master door
lock switch on the driver’s door for more than
five seconds. Release the switch after you hear
one click.

Move the shift lever to (P .

Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q *1 within 20 seconds.
u Customization is completed.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2:Default setting

148

—

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

149 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting

■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options
Steps

Driver's Door Open Mode*2

Park Unlock Mode

Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to (P .

Close the driver’s door.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .

Move the shift lever out of (P
with the brake pedal depressed.

Off

Open the driver's door.
*1

Press and hold the left side of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more than five seconds. Release the switch after
you hear a click twice.

Controls

—

Move the shift lever to (P .

Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q *1 within 20 seconds.
u Customization is completed.

—

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2:Default setting

149

Opening and Closing the Tailgate
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or
closing it.
Models without power tailgate

• Open the tailgate all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.
• Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
All models

Controls

Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 76

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

3 WARNING
Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate
that is being opened or closed can be
seriously injured.
Make sure that all people are clear of the
tailgate before opening or closing it.
Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to
put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo
area when closing the tailgate.
When you are storing or picking up luggage from the
cargo, or by raising and lowering your foot under the
center of the rear bumper for hands free access,
while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the
exhaust pipe. You may get burned.
Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They
may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden
acceleration, or a crash.

150

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuPrecautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Models with power tailgate

The power tailgate can be operated by pressing the power tailgate button on the
remote transmitter, pressing the power tailgate button in the driver side control
panel, pressing the button on the tailgate, or by raising and lowering your foot
under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access.
The power tailgate can be opened/closed when the transmission is in (P .

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
NOTICE

Do not push or pull on the power tailgate when it is
being automatically opened or closed.
Forcibly opening or closing the power tailgate while
in operation can deform the tailgate frame.

Controls

When operating the power tailgate, make sure there
is enough space around your vehicle. People near the
tailgate may be seriously hurt if the tailgate hits or
closes on their heads. Be especially cautious if
children are around.
The power tailgate may not open or close under the
following conditions:
• You start the engine while the tailgate is
automatically opening or closing.
• The vehicle is parked on a steep hill.
• The vehicle is swayed in a strong wind.
• The tailgate or the roof is covered with snow or ice.
If you close the power tailgate with all the doors
locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.

151

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate *

Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate *
■ Using the Hands Free Access *
With the smart entry remote on you, you can
open or close the tailgate hands free by raising
and lowering your foot (in a kicking motion)
under the center of the rear bumper.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and a
beeper sounds once, then the tailgate
begins to move.
Controls

152

* Not available on all models

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate *
During heavy rain or in other instances when the
vehicle becomes very wet, the sensor may not
properly detect your foot motion.
When performing work on or around the rear section
of the vehicle, you may inadvertently open or close
the tailgate.
To prevent this from happening, select Customized
Features on the audio/information screen display and
then select OFF for the feature.
2 Customized Features P. 337

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate *

■ Using the Remote Transmitter

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate *

Press the power tailgate button for more than
one second to operate when the power mode
is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper
sounds.
If you press the button again while the power
tailgate is moving, it will stop.
Press the button for more than one second,
and the power tailgate will reverse direction.

Installing aftermarket components other than
genuine Honda accessories on the power tailgate
may prevent it from fully opening or closing.
Make sure the power tailgate is fully open before you
get your luggage in and out.

■ Customizing when to open the tailgate
ANYTIME: The power tailgate unlocks and opens at the same time. This is the
default setting.
WHEN UNLOCKED: The tailgate opens when all doors are unlocked.
2 Customized Features P. 337

* Not available on all models

If you replace the battery or the power tailgate fuse
while the tailgate is open, the power tailgate may be
disabled. The power tailgate resumes once you
manually close the tailgate.

Controls

Power
Tailgate
Button

If you close the power tailgate when all the doors are
locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.

Make sure the power tailgate is fully closed before
you start the vehicle.
The beeper sounds when you start driving while the
power tailgate is still open, or closing.

Continued

153

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate *

■ Using the Power Tailgate Button
To open or close the power tailgate, press the
power tailgate button for about one second.
Some exterior lights flash and the beeper
sounds.
u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper
sounds.
Controls

If you press the button again while the power
tailgate is moving, it will stop.
Press the button for about one second, and
the power tailgate will reverse direction.

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate *
If the power tailgate meets resistance while opening
or closing, the auto reverse feature reverses the
direction. The beeper sounds three times.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
tailgate is almost closed to make sure that it fully
closes.
Do not touch the sensors located on both sides of the
tailgate. The power tailgate does not close if you
touch either sensor when you are trying to close the
tailgate.
Be careful not to scratch the sensors with a sharp
object. If scratched, they can be damaged, and the
power tailgate closing feature malfunctions.

154

* Not available on all models

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate *

■ Using the Tailgate Outer Handle

1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate *

If you press the outer handle of the tailgate for
no longer than one second, the tailgate opens
automatically.
u The beeper sounds.
u If you want to open the tailgate
manually, press the button for more than
one second.

Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else
with the remote is within range.
You can change the power tailgate operation setting
on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 337

Controls

Outer Handle

2 Opening and Closing the Tailgate
P. 150

Do not leave the key, remote transmitter*, or smart
entry remote* in the cargo area before closing the
tailgate.

If you are carrying the keyless remote, you do
not have to unlock the tailgate before
opening it.
To close the tailgate, press the outer handle
again while the tailgate opening.
If you press the outer handle again while the
power tailgate is moving, it will stop.
Press the outer handle, and the power tailgate
will reverse direction.

* Not available on all models

Continued

155

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

156 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate *

■ Using the Tailgate Inner Button
Press the button on the tailgate to close the
power tailgate.
u The beeper sounds.

Controls

156

If you press the button again while the power
tailgate is moving, it will stop. Press and
release the button again, and the power
tailgate will reverse direction.

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate *

■ Programming Tailgate Position

1Programming Tailgate Position

The extent to which the power tailgate
automatically opens can be programed.

Continued

Controls

To program:
1. Open the tailgate to the desired position.
u If you want to reprogram the power
tailgate to open all the way, manually
raise the tailgate to its upper most
position and follow the next step.
2. Press and hold the tailgate inner button
until you hear short two beeps following
one long buzzer.

If the tailgate is only slightly opened, the position
cannot be programmed, even if you push the inner
button.

157

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate *

■ Auto-Closer
If you manually close the power tailgate, it latches automatically.

1Auto-Closer
The auto-closer feature does not activate if you press
the tailgate outer handle while the power tailgate is
closing.
Do not put any force on the tailgate while the power
tailgate is latching.

Controls

Keep your hands away from the tailgate when you
manually close the tailgate and let it latch
automatically. It is dangerous to put your hands
around the tailgate as it starts to latch itself.

■ Power Tailgate Fall Detection
Automatically lowers the power tailgate when there is a possibility that the fully
opened power tailgate can fall down by its own weight (for example, by snow on
the tailgate). The beeper sounds while the power tailgate lowers.

1Power Tailgate Fall Detection
If you try to manually close the power tailgate
immediately after it fully opens, the power tailgate
fall detection may activate
Once the power tailgate fall detection activates, wait
until the power tailgate fully closes. Keep away from
the power tailgate when it is in motion.
If the power tailgate fall detection constantly
activates, consult at a dealer.

158

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate

Opening/Closing the Tailgate
■ Using the Tailgate Release Button

1Using the Tailgate Release Button

When all the doors are unlocked or press the
tailgate unlock button on the remote
transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked.
Press the tailgate release button and lift open
the tailgate.
Models with smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else
with the remote is within range.
Controls

Outer Handle

If you are carrying the smart entry remote, you
do not have to unlock the tailgate before
opening it.
To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle,
pull the tailgate down, and push it closed
from outside.

Do not leave the key, remote transmitter *, or smart
entry remote* in the cargo area before closing the
tailgate.

Inner Handle

* Not available on all models

Continued

159

uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate

■ Using the Remote Transmitter *
Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the
tailgate.

Controls

Tailgate
Unlock
Button

160

* Not available on all models

1Using the Remote Transmitter *
If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using
the remote transmitter or smart entry remote*, when
closing, the tailgate locks automatically.

Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.

NOTICE

Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or
accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the key with you whenever you leave the
vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake
pedal before turning the vehicle on the first time after
the battery has been disconnected.

Controls

Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button *:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch*1.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the ignition
switch.

1Immobilizer System

Security System Alarm *
The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not go off if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or smart entry system.

1Security System Alarm *
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.

However, the alarm goes off if a door is opened with the key, then the shift lever is
moved out of (P or the hood is opened before the power mode is set to ON.

■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all the exterior lights flash.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

Continued

161

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm *

■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter or smart entry system. The system,
along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

■ Setting the security system alarm

Controls

The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
• The hood and tailgate are closed.
• All doors and tailgate are locked with the key or the remote transmitter.

■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.

■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key, remote
transmitter, smart entry system, or the power mode is set to ON. The security system
alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

162

* Not available on all models

1Security System Alarm *
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• Opening the hood with the hood release handle.
• Moving the shift lever out of (P .
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

163 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm *

■ Panic Mode
■ The panic button on the remote

■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

Controls

Panic
Button

transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.

Panic
Button

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

163

Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w *1, using the switches on the doors. The driver side switches can be used to open
and close all the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver side must be switched off (not pushed
in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the
driver's seat.

Controls

When the power window lock button is switched on (pushed in, indicator on), you
can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on if a
child is in the vehicle.

■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
ON
OFF
Power Window
Lock Button

■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.

Driver’s
Window
Switch
Indicator
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch

■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

164

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off*1.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
You cannot fully open the rear windows.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

165 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.

Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
Open
Controls

■ Opening Windows and the Moonroof * or Panoramic Roof*1
with the Remote

Unlock
Button

To open: Press the unlock button, and then
within 10 seconds, press it again and keep it
pressed. If the windows and moonroof * or
Panoramic Roof*1 stop midway, repeat the
procedure.

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped
* Not available on all models

Continued

165

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

166 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing Windows and the Moonroof * or
Panoramic Roof*1 with the Key

To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
Close
Controls

Open

To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof or panoramic roof*1 at the desired
position. If you want further adjustment,
repeat the same operation.

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped

166

* Not available on all models

Moonroof *
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in
the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

■ Using the Moonroof Switch
■ Automatic operation
Open

The moonroof automatically opens or closes
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.

■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.

■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped
* Not available on all models

3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone's hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
You can use the remote transmitter or the key to
operate the moonroof.
2 Opening Windows and the Moonroof * or
Panoramic Roof*1 with the Remote P. 165
2 Opening/Closing Windows and the Moonroof *
or Panoramic Roof*1 with the Key P. 166

Controls

Tilt
Close

To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

1Using the Moonroof Switch

167

Panoramic Roof*1
Opening/Closing the Panoramic Roof
You can operate the panoramic roof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch
in the front of the ceiling to open and close the panoramic roof.

1Opening/Closing the Panoramic Roof

3 WARNING
Opening or closing the panoramic roof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.

Controls

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the panoramic roof before opening or
closing it.
NOTICE

Opening the panoramic roof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the panoramic roof panel or motor.
The panoramic roof and sunshade can be operated
for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the panoramic roof to change
directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing
when the panoramic roof is almost closed to ensure
that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects,
including fingers, are clear of the panoramic roof.

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped

168

uuPanoramic Roof*1 uOpening/Closing the Panoramic Roof

You can use the remote transmitter or the key to
operate the panoramic roof.
2 Opening Windows and the Moonroof * or
Panoramic Roof*1 with the Remote P. 165
2 Opening/Closing Windows and the
Moonroof * or Panoramic Roof*1 with the
Key P. 166

1Using the Sunshade Switch
The sunshade can be opened or closed to adjust the
amount of light that enters the cabin.

■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
Open

The sunshade automatically opens or closes all
the way. To stop the sunshade midway, touch
the switch briefly.
Close

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped
* Not available on all models

Continued

Controls

■ Using the Sunshade Switch

When you use the sunshade switch to open the
sunshade, the panoramic roof does not move.
The sunshade cannot be fully closed if the panoramic
roof is open. When you close the sunshade with the
panoramic roof open, the sunshade stops slightly
ahead of the panoramic roof glass. When you push
the switch forward again, the sunshade and the
panoramic roof close together.

169

uuPanoramic Roof*1 uOpening/Closing the Panoramic Roof

■ Using the Panoramic Roof Switch
■ Automatic operation

1Using the Panoramic Roof Switch
Comfort Position

To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
Open

Tilt
Controls

The panoramic roof automatically opens or
closes all the way. To stop the panoramic glass
midway, touch the switch briefly.

■ Tilting the panoramic roof up
To tilt: Push on the centre of the panoramic
roof switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

Full Open Position
The panoramic roof cannot be fully opened in a
single operation. The panoramic roof has a
“comfort” position or wind noise reduction position
at which the roof first stops. To open fully, pull the
switch back again after the roof has stopped at this
position.
Whenever the panoramic roof is opening, the
sunshade moves along with it. However, when the
panoramic roof is closing, the sunshade does not
move.
When you tilt open the panoramic roof, the sunshade
opens slightly to let in fresh air. When you close the
panoramic roof from this position, the sunshade
returns to its closed position.

170

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch *
1Ignition Switch *
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key

in this position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system
and other accessories in this position.

You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in (P .
If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q , a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.

(w ON: This is the position when driving.

you let go of the key.

When this happens, the following messages appear
on the driver information interface *:
• In LOCK (0 :
or the symbol with a Remove
Key From Ignition
• In ACCESSORY (q :
or the symbol with a
Return Ignition Switch To Lock (0) Position
The buzzer will stop when you take the key out.

Controls

(e START: This position is for starting the
engine. The switch returns to ON (w when

If the key won't turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY
(q , turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.

* Not available on all models

171

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

ENGINE START/STOP Button *
■ Changing the Power Mode

1ENGINE START/STOP Button *
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
The button is off.
The steering wheel is locked*1.
The power to all electrical components is turned off.

Controls

ACCESSORY
The button blinks (in red).
Operate the audio system and other accessories
in this position.

Without
pressing the
brake pedal

ON
The button blinks (in red).
All electrical components can be used.

Press the button without the
shift lever in (P .
Shift to (P then press the
button.

*1:Except U.S. models

172

* Not available on all models

Press the button.
U.S. models

Shift to (P .

Operating Range

You can start the engine when the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.
The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is
close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
vehicle.
If the smart entry remote battery is weak, beeper
sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start
Button message appears on the MID.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 611
The power system may also start if the keyless access
remote is close to the door or window, even if it is
outside the vehicle.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

■ Automatic Power Off

1ENGINE START/STOP Button *

If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P and the power
mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the battery drain.
Canadian models

* Not available on all models

Continued

Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.
Controls

When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock.
You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times to switch the mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).

Canadian models

If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE
OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while moving the steering wheel left and
right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the
mode to change.

173

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

■ Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.

■ Smart Entry Remote Reminder

Controls

Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/
and outside the vehicle to remind you that the
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put
back inside, place it within its operational
range.

■ When the power mode is in ON
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed, warning
buzzers sound from both inside and outside the
vehicle. A warning message on the driver
information interface notifies the driver inside
that the remote is out.

■ When the power mode is in ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.

174

1Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to go off. Under some other conditions that can
prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is
within the system’s operational range.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

175 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Ignition Switch
Position

LOCK (0)
(with/without
the key)

Without Smart Entry
System

●

VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK)

●
●

Engine is turned off.
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.

ACCESSORY

ON (II)

●

Normal key position
while driving.
All electrical components
can be used.

Button is: Blinking

With Smart Entry
Button-Off
Button-Blinking
System and ENGINE ● Engine is turned off and ● Engine is turned off.
● Some electrical
power is shut down.
START/STOP
● The steering wheel is
components such as the
Button
locked*1.
audio system and the
● No electrical
accessory power socket
components can be
can be operated.
used.

START (III)

●

Use this position to start
the engine.
The ignition switch
returns to the ON (II)
position when you
release the key.

Controls

Power Mode

Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
The steering wheel is
locked*1.
No electrical
components can be
used.

ACCESSORY (I)

START

ButtonButton-On
Blinking (engine is turned ● The mode automatically
returns to ON after the
off)
engine starts.
On (engine is running)
● All electrical components
can be used.

*1:Canadian models

175

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

176 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

Turn Signals
Right Turn

The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w *1.

■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
Left Turn
Controls

This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

176

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Light Switches
■ Manual Operation
High Beams

Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking,
side marker, tail, and rear
license plate lights

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the power mode setting
or position of the ignition switch.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.

Models without smart entry system

If you remove the key from the ignition switch with
the lights on, a light on reminder chime sounds when
you open the driver's door.
Models with smart entry system

If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened.
All models

When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Indicators P. 80

Controls

Flashing the high beams
Low Beams

1Light Switches

Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.

■ Lights off
Turn the lever to OFF either when:
• The shift lever is in (P .
• The parking brake is applied.
To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even
if you do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights come on automatically when:
• The shift lever is moved out of (P and the parking brake is released.
• The vehicle starts to move.

Continued

177

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) *
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the power mode is in ON.

Controls

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
u You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
2 Customized Features P. 337

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) *
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Models without automatic
intermittent wipers

Light Sensor

Models with automatic
intermittent wipers

Light Sensor

178

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with
you, and close the driver’s door.
u You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 337

Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
Max
High
Mid
Low
Min

The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
Bright

Dark
Controls

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 with the headlight switch on, but do
not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in
the AUTO position).

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) *

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

179

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights *

Fog Lights *
Can be used when the low beam headlights
are on.
Rotate the switch up from the OFF position to
the
position.

Fog Light Switch
Controls

180

* Not available on all models

1Fog Lights *
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Daytime Running Lights P. 184

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam System *

Auto High-Beam System *
Using a camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, this system detects light
sources ahead of the vehicle. Depending on the light source, the system
automatically switches the headlights to high beam for optimal visibility at night.
The system operates when:

■ The headlight switch is in AUTO.
■ The lever is in the low beam
position.

■ The low beams are on and the

How it works:
When the camera detects lights coming from a preceding or oncoming vehicle, the
headlights remain in low beam.
When the camera detects no lights coming from a preceding or oncoming vehicle,
the headlights change to high beam.
The view angle or distance that the camera can detect lights ahead differs
depending on conditions, such as the brightness of the lights and the weather.

The auto high-beam system determines when to
change the headlight beams by responding to the
brightness of the lights ahead of your vehicle. In the
following cases, the system may not respond to the
lights properly:
• The brightness of the lights from the preceding or
oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
• Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
fog, windshield frost, etc.).
• Other light sources, such as streetlights and electric
billboards are illuminating the road ahead.
• The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
changes.
• The road is bumpy or has many curves.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you, or a vehicle in front
of you is not in the preceding or oncoming
direction.
• Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear.

Controls

system recognizes that you are
driving at night.
■ The vehicle speed is above 25 mph
(40 km/h).

1Auto High-Beam System *

If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient
for driving, change the headlight beams manually.
If you do not want the system to be activated at any
time when the headlight switch is in AUTO, consult a
dealer.
If you do not want the system to be activated at any
time when the headlight switch is in AUTO, consult a
dealer or disable the system.
2 Disabling or Re-enabling the System P. 183

* Not available on all models

Continued

181

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam System *

■ To Operate the System

1To Operate the System

To activate the system, turn the headlight
switch to AUTO and then set the headlights
to low beam. The auto high-beam indicator
will come on.
2 Light Switches P. 177

Controls

Headlight Switch

The high beams remain on unless:
• You have been driving below 15 mph (24 km/h) for an extended amount of time.
• The speed of the vehicle drops below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• The windshield wipers have been running at a high speed for more than a few
seconds.
• You enter a well lit location.
The high beams come back on once the condition that caused them to turn off no
longer exists.
If needed, you can temporarily turn the high-beams off manually. Turn on the highbeams by pushing the lever forward until you hear a click, or flash the high beams
once by pulling the lever towards you. To turn the high beams back on, repeat one
of the procedures.

182

For the auto high-beam system to work properly:
• Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard.
• Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
• Do not attach an object, sticker or film in the area
around the camera.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of
the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.
If the

message appears:

• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the air flow directed towards the camera.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
If the

message appears:

• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam System *

■ Disabling or Re-enabling the System

The auto high-beam system will remain in the
selected disabled or enabled setting each time you
start the engine.

Controls

Disable or re-enable the system when the
vehicle is parked and the power mode is in ON
and the light switch is in the AUTO position.
Disabling the system: Pull the light switch
lever towards you and hold it for at least 40
seconds.
Re-enabling the system: Pull the light
switch lever towards you and hold it for at
least 30 seconds.

1Disabling or Re-enabling the System

183

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

184 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights

Daytime Running Lights
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:
• The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
• The headlight switch is AUTO or OFF or
.
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition
switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running
lights.
Controls

The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when
the headlight switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

184

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers
■ Windshield Wipers/Washers

Pull to
use
washer.

MIST
OFF

The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
■ MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT*2/AUTO*3, LO,
HI)
Move the lever up or down to change the
wiper settings.
■ Adjusting wiper operation *
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
operation.
Lower speed, fewer sweeps

INT*2/AUTO*3
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe

Higher speed, more sweeps

■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever for more than one
second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two
or three more times to clear the windshield,
then stop.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
*2: Models with manual intermittent operation
*3: Models with automatic intermittent operation
Continued
* Not available on all models

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defogger to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.

Controls

Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring *

1Wipers and Washers

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
Models with intermittent time adjustment ring

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
wipers make a single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
If the wiper stops operating due to an obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the
ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1,
then remove the obstacle.

185

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

■ Automatic Intermittent Wipers *

1Wipers and Washers

When you push the lever down to AUTO, the
windshield wipers sweep once, and go into
the automatic mode.

Controls

Adjustment Ring

The wipers operate intermittently, at low
speed, or at high speed and stops in
accordance with the amount of rainfall the
rainfall sensor detects.

1Automatic Intermittent Wipers *
The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
Rainfall Sensor

■ AUTO sensitivity adjustment
When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you
can adjust the sensitivity of the rain fall sensor
(using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will
operate in accordance with your preference.
Sensor sensitivity
Low Sensitivity

High Sensitivity

186

The wiper motor may stop motor operation
temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation
will return to normal within a few minutes, once the
circuit has returned to normal.

* Not available on all models

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the
following situation in order to prevent severe damage
to the wiper system:
• Cleaning the windshield
• Driving through a car wash
• No rain present

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

187 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

■ Rear Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper and washer can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.

INT: Intermittent
ON: Continuous wipe
OFF
Washer

)
Sprays while you rotate the switch to this
position.
Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the
washer. Once released, it stops operating
after a few more sweeps.

Controls

■ Washer (

■ Operating in reverse
When you shift the transmission to (R with the windshield wipers activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.
Front Wiper Position

Rear Wiper Operation

INT (Intermittent)

Intermittent

LO (Low speed wipe)
HI (High speed wipe)

Continuous

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

187

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Brightness Control
With the parking lights are turned on and the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1, you can use the
brightness control knob to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
Control Knob
Controls

You will hear a beeper when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. Several
seconds after adjusting the brightness, you
will be returned to the previous screen.

Instrument panel brightness differs between when
the exterior lights are on and when they are off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when the
lights are on.
Turn the knob to the right until the brightness display
is up to max. This cancels the reduced instrument
panel brightness when the exterior lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
To cancels the reduced instrument panel brightness
when the exterior lights are on, turn the knob to the
right until the brightness display is up to max, the
beeper sounds.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

188

1Brightness Control

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

189 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Information display

■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the
information display while you are adjusting it.

Controls

Driver information interface

189

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDefogger/Heated Door Mirror *

Defogger/Heated Door Mirror *
■ Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window
and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
Models without heated door mirror

Controls

The rear defogger automatically switches off
after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside
temperature. However, if the outside
temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below, it does
not automatically switch off.
Models with heated door mirror

The rear defogger and heated door mirror
automatically switches off after 10-30
minutes depending on the outside
temperature. However, if the outside
temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below, it does
not automatically switch off.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

190

* Not available on all models

1Defogger/Heated Door Mirror *
NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged or deiced.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDefogger/Heated Door Mirror *

Canadian models

■ Heated Windshield Button
Press the heated windshield button to deice
the windshield when the power mode is in
ON.

1Heated Windshield Button
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged or deiced.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.

Controls

191

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System *

Driving Position Memory System *
You can store two driver’s seat positions (except for power lumbar) with the driving
position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter or the smart
entry system, the seat adjusts automatically to one of the two preset positions.
• DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
• DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
DRIVER 1

DRIVER 2

Controls

192

* Not available on all models

1Driving Position Memory System *
Using the audio/information screen, you can disable
the automatic seat adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 337

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System *

■ Storing a Position in Memory
Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2

■ Recalling the Stored Position
Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2

1. Move the shift lever to (P .
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2 ).
u You will hear a beep, and the indicator
light will blink.

After you press the SET button, the storing operation
will be canceled when:
• You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
• You readjust the seat position before the doublebeep.
• You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
Controls

SET Button

1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the
driver’s seat to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button.
u You will hear a beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink.
3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2
within five seconds of pressing the SET
button.
u Once the seat position has been
memorized, the indicator light on the
button you pressed stays on.

1Storing a Position in Memory

1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat will stop moving if you:
• Press the SET button, or a memory button ( (1 or
(2 ).
• Adjust the seat position.
• Shift into any position except (P .

The seat will automatically move to the
memorized position. When it has finished
moving, you will hear a beeper, and the
indicator light stays on.

193

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

Controls

194

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
To adjust
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3.
Push
the steering wheel adjustment lever
Lever
To lock
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.

Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.

■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions *
Tab

Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.

1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Front Seat P. 197

Controls

Daytime
Position
Down
Night Position

■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare
from headlights behind you. This feature is
always active.

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R .

Sensor

* Not available on all models

195

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

196 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Mirror position adjustment

Adjustment
Switch

Selector
Switch

Controls

L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

196

Adjusting the Seats
Front Seat
Allow sufficient
space.

Move back.

■ Adjusting the Seat Positions

1Adjusting the Seats

3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.

■ Adjusting the front power seat *

Controls

Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment

Height Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment

* Not available on all models

Continued

197

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

198 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seat

■ Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch *

Higher part of
the Lumbar
support

Controls
Lower part of
the Lumbar
support

198

Lumbar
Support
Adjustment
Switch

* Not available on all models

Press the top: To increase the higher part of
the lumbar support.
Press the bottom: To increase the lower part
of the lumbar support. (The higher part
support is decreased.)
Press the front: To increase the entire
lumbar support.
Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar
support.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seat

■ Adjusting the front manual seat(s) *

1Adjusting the front manual seat(s) *
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Height Adjustment
Controls

(Driver’s seat only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.

Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Horizontal Position
Adjustment

Pull up the lever to
change the angle.

Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.

* Not available on all models

Continued

199

uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seat

■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.

Controls

200

The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

3 WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

■ Adjusting the Front Head Restraints

1Adjusting the Front Head Restraints

Position head in the center
of the head restraint.

To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.

Continued

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.

Controls

Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant's head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant's ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.

In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
• Do not place any objects between an occupant and
the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.

201

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

■ Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Position

Controls

A passenger sitting in the center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.

■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
Front and rear center head restraints

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.

202

1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

3 WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.

3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
Controls

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

203

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Rear Seats
■ Folding Down the Rear Seats
Latch plate

1Folding Down the Rear Seats

1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the
latch plate into the slot on the side of the
anchor buckle.
2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the
ceiling.
2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 46

Controls

Anchor buckle
Release Lever

3. Lower the rear seat head restraint to its
lowest position. Put the armrest back into
the seat-back.
From the rear seat side

4. Pull the release lever and fold down the
seat.

3 WARNING
Make sure the seat-backs are latched
securely before driving.
The rear seat-backs can be folded down to
accommodate bulkier items in the cargo area.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the
tailgate open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 76
When returning the seat-back to its original position,
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
belts are positioned in front of the seat-back.
Make sure all items in the cargo area or items
extending through the opening into the rear
seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.

From the cargo area side

Release Lever

204

4. Pull the release lever and fold down the
seat.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

205 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest

Armrest
■ Using the Front Seat Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
To adjust:
Slide the armrest to a desired position.

Controls

■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.

205

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ Interior Light Switches

1Interior Light Switches

■ ON

Models with moonroof

Front
Off

Controls

Door
Activated
Position
Models with panoramic roof

Front
Door Activated Position

The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver's door.
Models without smart entry system

• You remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Models with smart entry system

On
Off

• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out
and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following situations:
• When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.
Models without smart entry system

• When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
Models with smart entry system

• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features P. 337
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
• When you lock the driver's door.
Models without smart entry system

• When you close the driver's door with the key in
the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

• When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY mode.
• When you set the power mode to ON.
When the interior light switch is in ON, if you close all
doors in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, the interior
lights go off after about 30 minutes. However, when
the battery is weaken, the interior lights go off after
about 30 minutes if any door is open.
If you leave any doors open in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
mode, or without the key in the ignition switch, the
interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.

206

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

207 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

■ Map Lights
Models without panoramic roof

■ Front
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lens.

Controls

Models with panoramic roof

Continued

207

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

208 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

Models without panoramic roof

■ Rear
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the button when the front interior
light switch is in the door activated position.

Off
On

Controls

Models with panoramic roof

■ Cargo Area Lights
■ ON
Off

The light comes on when you open the
tailgate, and goes off when closed.

■ OFF
The light stays off with or without opening the
tailgate.
On

208

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Interior Convenience Items
■ Glove Box

1Glove Box

Pull the handle to open the glove box. You
can lock the glove box with the master key or
the built-in key.

3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.

Glove Box

Controls

Continued

209

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

210 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Center Console Box
Knob

To open, pull the knob. You can change the
position of the tray by sliding it forward or
back.

Tray
Controls

■ Removing the tray
1. Slide the tray back.

2. Lift the edge of the tray up slightly, then
pull it out.

210

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

211 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Slot

Storing the tray:
Line the tray up with the slots located at the
rear section of the console box, and then push
it down all the way until it is in the locked
position.

Controls

Continued

211

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

212 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Under-floor Storage Area
Pull the strap to open the cargo floor lid.

Controls

■ Storing items on the lid at the bottom
position
This is convenient when storing a tall item.
1. Pull the strap upwards to lift the lid.
2. Pull the lid towards you until it disengages
from the support rods.

Support Rod

212

3. Push the far end of the lid down to the
bottom under the support rod, then lower
the other end.

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Beverage Holders

1Beverage Holders
NOTICE

■ Front seat beverage holders
Are located in the console between the front
seats.

Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.

Controls

■ Rear seat beverage holders
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.

Continued

213

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

214 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Front

■ Door side beverage holders
Are located on the both of front and rear door
side pockets.

Controls

214

Rear

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Accessory Power Sockets

1Accessory Power Sockets

The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
(q or ON (w *1.
■ Accessory power socket on the console
panel
Open the cover to use it.

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts or less (15 amps).
Controls

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
Continued

215

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

216 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Accessory power socket in the console
compartment
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.

Controls

■ Accessory power socket (cargo area)*1
Open the cover to use it.

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped

216

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Coat Hook

1Coat Hook

There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle. Pull it down to use it.

Hooks

1Tie-down Anchors

The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor
can be used to install a net for securing items.

Controls

■ Tie-down Anchors

The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.

Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area
while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have
to brake hard.

Hooks

Continued

217

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Cargo Hooks

1Cargo Hooks

The cargo hooks on the driver's side of the
cargo area can be used to hang a light items.

Controls

218

Hook

NOTICE

Do not hang a large object or an object that weighs
more than 6 lbs (3 kg) on the side cargo hooks.
Hanging heavy or large objects may damage the
hooks.

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Sunglasses Holder

1Sunglasses Holder

To open the sunglasses holder, press and
release the indent. To close, press it again until
it latches.

Press

Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.

You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
Controls

■ Conversation mirror
The sunglasses holder comes with a mirror.
Open the sunglasses holder fully, then push it
back to the first detent.
You can use the mirror to view the rear seats.

Continued

219

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Heated Steering Wheel*1

1Heated Steering Wheel*1

The power mode must be in ON to use the
heated steering wheel.
Press the button on the right side of the
steering wheel.

Controls

When a comfortable temperature is reached,
press the button again to turn it off.
The heated steering wheel is turned off every
time you start the engine, even if you turned it
on the last time you drove the vehicle.

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped

220

Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously
when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the
battery may be weakened, making the engine
difficult to start.

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Front Seat Heaters *

1Front Seat Heaters *

The power mode is in ON to use the seat
heaters. The HI setting heats the seats faster
than the LO setting.

3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.

* Not available on all models

Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

When the power mode is turn on after it is
turned off, the previous setting of seat heaters
is maintained.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for
the seat heater as well as that for the seat ventilation
system will automatically be reduced by one level at a
time until the seat heater or ventilation system shuts
off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior
environment.

Continued

Controls

Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.

221

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Rear Seat Heaters*1

1Rear Seat Heaters*1

There is no heater in the rear center seating
position.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
Controls

The rear seat heaters is turned off every time
you start the engine, even if you turned it on
the last time you drove the vehicle.

3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
The rear seat heater is turned off every time you start
the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you
drove the vehicle.
When the power mode is turned on after it is turned
off, the previous setting of front seat heaters is
maintained.

*1: Canadian models only, if equipped

222

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Rear Cargo Cover *

Handle

The rear cargo cover can be used to conceal
items in the cargo area and protect them from
direct sunlight.
■ To extend:
Slightly lift up on the handle at the center
edge of the cover to unhook each end, then
pull the cover rearward and clip the mounting
rods in the hooks at both sides of the tailgate
opening.
■ To retract:
Slip the rods out of the hooks, then slowly roll
it back until it is completely retracted.

Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area
while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have
to brake hard.
Do not stack objects higher than the top of the seat
in the cargo area. They could block your view and be
thrown about the vehicle during a sudden stop.
To prevent rear cargo cover damage:
• Do not place items on the rear cargo cover.
• Do not put weight on the rear cargo cover.
Be sure that each mounting rod sets in its respective
retention groove when you retract the rear cargo
cover. If they are not set in the grooves, the rods may
rattle as they contact the surrounding surfaces.

Controls

Mounting Rod

1Rear Cargo Cover *

Hook

■ To remove:
Push either end of the housing inward, then
lift it out of its position.

* Not available on all models

223

Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Models without SYNC button

Models with SYNC button

1Using Automatic Climate Control
Press the CLIMATE button to display A/C, MODE,
fan control information on the audio/information
screen to operate manually. Select icon to turn on or
off A/C, change the vent mode, or change the fan
speed.
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.

Controls

The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that were pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on AUTO, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
Models without SYNC button

2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
Models with SYNC button

2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control
dial.
3. Press the
(on/off) button to cancel.

224

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the
button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.
While ECON mode is active, the climate control
system may have reduced cooling performance.

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the
(recirculation) or
(fresh air) button to switch the mode
depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior
through the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator on): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system
in fresh air mode in normal situations.

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

Press the
button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.

Continued

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.

Controls

Pressing the
(windshield defroster) button
turns the air conditioning system on and
automatically switches the system to fresh air
mode.

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.

225

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the
2. Press the

Controls

226

1To rapidly defrost the windows

button.
button.

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.

uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode *

Synchronized Mode *
1Synchronized Mode *
When the system is in dual mode, the driver’s side
temperature and the passenger’s side temperature
can be set separately.

Passenger’s
Side
Temperature
Control Dial

Controls

Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Dial

SYNC Button

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver’s side and the passenger’s
side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system switches to synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.

* Not available on all models

227

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

228 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.

Sensor

Controls

228

Sensor

Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 230
USB Port(s) ....................................... 231
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 232
Audio Remote Controls.................... 233
Models with color audio system

Audio System Basic Operation
Audio/Information Screen ................ 238
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 242
Display Setup ................................... 243
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 244
Playing an iPod ................................ 246
Playing Pandora®.............................. 249
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 251

* Not available on all models

Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 254
Siri® Eyes Free .................................. 257
Models with Display Audio

Audio System Basic Operation
Audio/Information Screen ................ 259
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 280
Display Setup ................................... 281
Voice Control Operation .................. 283
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 287
Playing SiriusXM® Radio * ................. 291
Playing an iPod ................................ 298
Song By VoiceTM (SBV)...................... 301
Playing Pandora® *............................ 305
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 307

Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 310
HondaLink® ..................................... 312
Wi-Fi Connection............................. 317
Siri® Eyes Free .................................. 319
Apple CarPlayTM ............................... 320
Android AutoTM ............................... 323
Audio Error Messages ...................... 327
General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 332
Customized Features........................ 337
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *.. 370
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 373, 396
Compass * .......................................... 430

229

Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service *. It can also
play USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the
remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface *.

1About Your Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio is available on a subscription basis
only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio *,
contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 332
SiriusXM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
SiriusXM® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM
Radio, Inc.

Features

iPod

USB Flash Drive
Remote Controls

230

* Not available on all models

iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.

uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s)

USB Port(s)
In the console compartment

Models
with
Display
Audio

Models
with color
audio
system

Models
with
Display
Audio

Models with Display Audio

u The USB port (1.5A) is for charging
devices, playing audio files and
connecting compatible phones with
Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM.

1USB Port(s)

• Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the vehicle.
Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.

• We recommend using an extension cable with the
USB port.

• Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.

• Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk
drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.

• We recommend keeping your data backed up
before using the device in your vehicle.

• Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.

■ On the back of the center console
compartment *
The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging
devices.

If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.

Features

On the back of the center console
compartment

Install the iPod USB connector or the USB flash
drive to the USB port.
u The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio
files on a USB flash drive, connecting a
cellular phone, and charging devices.

The USB port can supply up to 1.0A/1.5A/2.5A of
power. It does not output 1.0A/1.5A/2.5A unless the
device requests.
For amperage details, read the operating manual of
the device that needs to be charged.
Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or ON
(w *1 first.
USB Port (2.5A)

This port is for battery charge only. You cannot play
music even if you have connected a music player to it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port
may generate noise in the radio you are listening to.

231

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

232 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
Features
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

232

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Audio Remote Controls
Models with color audio system

1Audio Remote Controls

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
(+ Button
FM1 FM2 AM USB/iPod Pandora®
Button
Bluetooth® Audio
Button

(- Button

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be available.

(+ (- (Volume) Buttons
Press (+ : To increase the volume.
Press (- : To decrease the volume.

Continued

Features

Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next station with strong reception.
Press and hold : To select the previous station with strong reception.
• When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio *
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Pandora®
Press : To skip to the next track.
Press and hold : To select the next station.
Press and hold : To select the previous station.
* Not available on all models

Some modes appear only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.

233

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Models with Display Audio

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on
the driver information interface.
3 4 Buttons
(+ (- Bar
3 or 4 to cycle through the audio
Press
ENTER Button
3 Button
mode as follows:
FM AM SiriusXM® * USB iPod
Button
Bluetooth® Audio Pandora® * Apps *
Button
Audio Apps *
4 Button

Features

(Display/Information)
Button

• When listening to the radio and SiriusXM® *
1. From the audio screen in the Driver Information Interface, press ENTER to switch
the display to a preset list you stored in the preset buttons.
2. Press 3 or 4 to select a preset, then press ENTER.
• When listening to a USB flash drive
1. From the audio screen in the Driver Information Interface, press ENTER to display
the folder list.
2. Press 3 or 4 to select a folder.
3. Press ENTER to display a list of tracks in that folder.
4. Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then press ENTER.
You can also swipe up or down to scroll through the list of tracks alphabetically.

234

* Not available on all models

1Audio Remote Controls
Some modes appear only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be available.
Press the
(Hang-up/back) button to go back
to the previous command or cancel a command.
Press the
(Display/information) button to switch
display.
2 Switching the Display P. 238

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

235 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Features

• When listening to an iPod
1. From the audio screen in the Driver Information Interface, press ENTER to display
the iPod music list.
2. Press 3 or 4 to select a category.
3. Press ENTER to display a list of items in the category.
4. Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then press ENTER.
u Press ENTER and press 3 or 4 repeatedly until the desired mode you want
to listen to is displayed.
You can also swipe up or down to scroll through the list of tracks alphabetically.
• When listening to Pandora® *
1. From the audio screen in the Driver Information Interface, press ENTER to display
the station list.
2. Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then press ENTER.
• When listening to Bluetooth® Audio
1. From the audio screen in the Driver Information Interface, press ENTER to display
the track list.
2. Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then press ENTER.
(+ (- (Volume) Bar
Press (+ : To increase the volume.
Press (- : To decrease the volume.
Slide your finger up or down to increase or decrease the volume, respectively.

* Not available on all models

Continued

235

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

236 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Features

236

Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Pandora® *
Press : To skip to the next track.
Press and hold : To select the next station.
Press and hold : To select the previous station.

* Not available on all models

Audio System Basic Operation
Models with color audio system

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w .
Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK
(Day/Night) Button
button to access some audio functions.
(Sound) Button

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
Press

Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.

(Back)
Button

Menu Display

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press
to set
your selection.
MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any
mode.
The available mode includes the wallpaper,
display, clock, language setup, and play
modes. Play modes can be also selected from
scan, random, repeat, and so on.

Menu Items
2 Adjust Clock P. 132
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 240
2 Display Setup P. 243
2 Scan P. 245, 253
2 Play Mode P. 248, 253
2 RDS Settings P. 245
2 Bluetooth P. 254
Press the SOURCE,
,
,
or
button on the
steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 233

Features

MENU/
CLOCK
Button
Selector Knob

to select.
to enter.

(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display.
(Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode.
(Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen
brightness.
Press the
button, then adjust the brightness using
.
u Each time you press the
button, the mode switches between the daytime
mode, nighttime mode and off mode.

237

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

238 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display

Audio/Information Screen

Audio
Features
Clock/Wallpaper

238

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

239 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.

■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

■ Change display
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Display Change, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press .
u If you want to return to the audio/information screen, select Audio.
Features

Continued

239

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•

2 USB Port(s) P. 231

Features

2. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
3. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.

•
4. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select Import, then press .
u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Rotate
to select a desired picture, then
press .
u The selected picture is displayed.
7. Press
to save the picture.
8. Press
to select OK.
9. Rotate
to select a location to save the
picture, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper
setting screen.

240

•
•

in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a
folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the error message appears.
The wallpaper setup is limited while driving.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Select, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper, then press

1Wallpaper Setup
To go back to the previous screen, press the
(Back) button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.

■ To view wallpaper once it is set

Features

1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Display Change, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press .
5. Press the
(Back) button until the top screen is displayed.

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press
6. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.

241

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound
(Sound) Button

Press the
(sound) button, and rotate
to scroll through the following choices:

Selector Knob
MID is selectable.

Features

BAS

Bass

MID

Middle

TRE

Treble

FAD

Fader

BAL

Balance

SVC

Speed-sensitive
Volume Compensation

Rotate
to adjust the sound setting, then
press .

242

1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.

Features

1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Display Adjustment,
then press .
4. Rotate
to select Brightness, then press
.
5. Rotate
to adjust the setting, then press
.

1Changing the Screen Brightness

1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Color Theme, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .

243

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

244 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

RADIO Button
Press to select a band.

Audio/Information Screen

Features

VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to search up and down
the selected band for a station with a strong
signal.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

244

Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio
frequency.
Press, and then turn to select an
item. After that, press again to
make your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu
items.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

1Playing AM/FM Radio

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press
while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select the station, then press

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory. FM1 and FM2 let you store 6
stations each.

■ Update List
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press
while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Update List, then press

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 233

.
1Radio Data System (RDS)

Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select RDS Settings, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Radio Text, then press .

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.

Features

■ Radio text

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press

245

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then press the MEDIA
button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231

USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.

Audio/Information Screen

Album Art

Features

MEDIA Button
Press to select iPod
(if connected).
VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press, and then turn to select
an item. After that, press
again to make your selection.

/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu
items.

Play Button
Press to resume a Pause Button
song.
Press to pause a
song.

246

Play Mode Buttons
Press to select a play mode.

(Back) Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the
Selector Knob

1. Press

to display the iPod music list.

1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 327

Item
Selection

2. Rotate

to select a category.

Features

Category
Selection

3. Press
to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
u Press
and rotate
repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is
displayed.

Continued

247

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums
in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums,
songs, genres, or podcasts, audiobooks, and
composers) in random order.
Shuffle All: Plays all available songs in a
selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, podcasts, audiobooks, and composers) in
random order.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current
song.

Play Mode Buttons
Features

248

■ To turn off a play mode
Press the selected button.

You can also select a play mode by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press
.
Rotate
to select a mode, then press
.
To turn it off, rotate
to select Normal Play, then
press
.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®

Playing Pandora®
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a
compatible smartphone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using
your USB cable to the USB port.
2 Phone Setup P. 379
2 USB Port(s) P. 231

1Playing Pandora®
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora
website for more information.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.

MEDIA Button
Press to select Pandora®.
Audio/Information Screen

Selector Knob
Turn to change a
station.
Press, and then turn to
select an item. After
that, press again to
make your selection.

Play/Pause Button
Select to resume or play a track.

MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu
items.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.

Like/Dislike Buttons
Select to evaluate a track.

Bookmark Button
Select to set a track as a bookmark.

(Skip) Button
Press
to skip a track.

Continued

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music
and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of
one of your favorite artists, tracks, comedians or
composers and Pandora® will create a custom station
that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features
hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to
Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.

Features

VOL/
(Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.

249

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®

■ How to Create a Station

1How to Create a Station

You can create a station when playing Pandora®.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.

Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® * P. 329
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.

Features

2. Rotate
press

to select New Station, then
.

3. Rotate
to select an item, then press
.
u You can select Genre, Current Artist,
or Current Track.

250

* Not available on all models

To change stations, press
on the main Pandora®
screen, and rotate
to select Station List, and
then select a new station.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, AAC*1 or WAV format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231

USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.

Audio/Information Screen

Features

MEDIA Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Selector Knob
Turn to change files.
Press, and then turn to select
an item. After that, press again
to make your selection.

/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.

MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu
items.

Play Mode Buttons (1-6)
Press to select a play mode.

(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Continued

251

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1. Press

to display a folder list.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 332
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.

Folder
Selection

2. Rotate

to select a folder.

Features
Track
Selection

3. Press
to display a list of files in that
folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .

252

If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 327

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons

Press the selected button.

Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat
Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the
current folder.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Random
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the
current folder in random order.
Random All: Plays all files in random order.
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling
of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling
of all files in the current folder.

Features

■ To turn off a play mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

253

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 379

MEDIA Button
Press to select
Bluetooth Audio mode
(if connected)

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Audio/Information Screen
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.

Features

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.
VOL/
(Volume/
Power) Knob
Press to turn
the audio
system on and
off.
Turn to adjust
the volume.
/
(Seek/Skip)
Buttons
Press
or
to
change files.
Play Button (Preset 1)
Press to resume a file.

254

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Pause Button (Preset 2)
Press to pause a file.

MENU/
CLOCK
Button
Press to
display the
menu items.

Selector Knob
Turn to change groups.
Press, and then turn to select
an item. After that, press again
to make your selection.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some
devices.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
MEDIA Button

Pause Button
Play Button

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the MEDIA button until the
Bluetooth® Audio mode is selected.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the USB port, you
may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to
select the Bluetooth® Audio system.

■ To pause or resume a file
Press the Play or Pause button to select a mode.

Continued

Features

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.

255

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the
Selector Knob

1. Press

to display the music search list.

Features

Category
Selection

2. Rotate

to select a category.

Item
Selection

3. Press
to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
u Press
and rotate
repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is
displayed.

256

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector
Knob
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the categories may not be displayed.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free

Siri® Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the
(Talk) button on the steering wheel when your
iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

1Siri® Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.

2 Phone Setup P. 404
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri®
Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.

■ Using Siri® Eyes Free

1Using Siri® Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
This audio system cannot operate the audio functions
by using Siri® Eyes Free.

Features

(Hang-up/back) Button
Press to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.

Appears
when Siri is
activated in
Siri® Eyes
Free
While in Siri® Eyes Free:
The display remains the same.
No feedback or commands
appear.
(Talk) Button
Press and hold until the display
changes as shown.

257

Audio System Basic Operation
Models with Display Audio

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
(Home): Select to go to the home screen.
(Home) Icon
(Map) Icon *
(Audio) Icon

2 Switching the Display P. 259

(Map) *: Select to display the map screen.
(Audio): Select to display the audio screen.
(Phone): Select to display the phone
screen.
(Back): Select to go back to the previous
screen when the icon is illuminated.

Features

(Day/Night) Icon
(Back) Icon
(Phone) Icon

(Day/Night): Select to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Select
once and select (- or (+ to make
an adjustment.
u Each time you select
, the mode
switches among the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.

258

* Not available on all models

Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 288, 289
2 Music Search List P. 299, 308
2 Scan P. 289, 290, 297, 309
2 Play Mode P. 300, 309

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display
■ Using the
Press the

1Using the

(display/information) button

You can edit, add, and delete the contents shown on
the driver information interface.
2 Customizing the Meter P. 264

(display/information) button
(display/information) button to change the display.

Features

(Display/Information) Button

Driver Information
Interface

Continued

259

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Using the audio/information screen

1Using the audio/information screen
Home Screen
Models without navigation system

Touchscreen operation
• Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
• Some items may be grayed out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction.
• You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or
use voice commands.
• Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.

Models with navigation system

You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.
2 Customized Features P. 337
Features

Select
to go to the home screen.
Select Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation *, HondaLink, Smartphone
Connection (Apple CarPlay, Android Auto), App List */
(APPS icon) *, or
Instrument Panel.

■ Phone
Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 396

260

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Info
Displays Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper, or System/Device
Information. Select MENU on the Info Menu screen to see all available options:
Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper and System/Device Information.

Features

Trip Computer:
• Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
• History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The
information is stored every time you reset Trip A.
To delete the history manually, select Delete history on the History of Trip A
tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes.
Voice Info: Displays the All Commands list.
Clock/Wallpaper: Displays the clock and wallpaper.
System/Device Information:
• System Info: Displays the software version of the audio system.
• USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device.

■ Audio
Displays the current audio information.

■ Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 337

■ Navigation *
Displays the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

* Not available on all models

Continued

261

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ HondaLink
Connects with your smartphone*1 to play personalized music, information, and
social media streams.
2 HondaLink® P. 312

■ Smartphone Connection
Displays the Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM.
2 Apple CarPlayTM P. 320
2 Android AutoTM P. 323

■ App List (

)
Adds or removes apps or widgets on the home screen.

Features

2 Home Screen P. 270

■ Instrument Panel
Selects from three customizable settings for the driver information interface.

*1: Available on specific phones only. Check automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/ for U.S.
and www.handsfreelink.ca for Canada for compatible phones and hondalink.com for U.S. and
honda.ca/hondalink for Canada for feature details.

262

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

263 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout
1. Select
.
2. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
4. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Features

Continued

263

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Customizing the Meter
You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents on the driver information interface.
1.
2. Settings
3. System
4. Configuration of Instrument Panel

Features

264

1Customizing the Meter
You can store up to three customized configurations.
To select or customize a configuration, select Swap
Config..
When you select Swap Config. during
customization, the settings you changed will be
saved.
When you select
during customization, the
settings you changed will not be saved and you will
be returned to the Instrument Panel screen.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Editing order

1Editing order

To change the order of the icons on the driver information interface, first select:
1. Edit Order

You can use an alternative method to change the
order of the icons. First select:
1. Edit Order
2. Select and hold the icon you want to move.
3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to
be.
4. Select OK.
uThe screen will return to the Instrument Panel
screen.

Edit Order

Features

2. Select the icon you want to move.
u You will see arrows on both sides of the
selected icon.

Select

3. Select the left or right arrow repeatedly to
move the icon to your desired position.
4. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the Instrument
Panel screen.
Arrow icons

OK
Continued

265

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Adding contents

1Adding contents

You can add icons to the driver information interface. To add icons, first select:
1. Add

Icons that are grayed out cannot be selected.
If an icon has a plus mark in the upper-right corner, it
means that the icon has already been added.

Add

Features

2. Select an icon you want to add.
u You will see a plus mark on the upper
right hand corner of the selected icon.

Select

3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the Instrument
Panel screen.

266

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Deleting contents

1Deleting contents

To delete contents on the driver information interface, first select:
1. Delete

You can also delete contents by selecting:
1. Delete or Edit Order
2. Select and hold an icon you want to delete.
3. Drag and drop the icon to the trash icon.
4. Select OK.
uThe screen will return to the Instrument Panel
screen.

Delete

Features

2. Select an icon you want to delete.
u The icon with an X on the upper right
hand corner can be deleted.

Select

3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the Instrument
Panel screen.

OK
Continued

267

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231

Features

268

2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock.
4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, select
Next, then open the Wallpaper tab.
5. Select Add New.
u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
7. Select Start Import to save the data.
u The display will return to the wallpaper
list.

The wallpaper you set up on Clock/Wallpaper Type
cannot be displayed on the driver information
interface.
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
• The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
• The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
• The individual file size limit is 5 MB.
• The maximum image size is 4,096 × 4,096 pixels. If
the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
• If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
After changing the screen interface design, you can
change the wallpaper by following procedure.
1. Select
.
2. Select .
3. Select and hold empty space on the home screen.
The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Change wallpaper.
5. Select Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper

1Wallpaper Setup

1. Select Settings.
2. Select Clock.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, select Next, then open the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Set.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a
preview at full-size screen.

■ To view wallpaper once it is set
Features

1. Select
.
2. Select Info.
3. Select MENU.
4. Select Clock/Wallpaper.

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Clock.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, select Next, then open the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Delete.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.
6. Select Yes to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
Continued

To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or
select
.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All,
then Yes.

269

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Home Screen

1Home Screen
The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add
any more pages.

■ To change to a next screen

Select
to go directly back to the first page of the
home screen from any page.
Swipe

Icon
Features

270

Selecting

Icon

Current page position

, or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ To use apps or widgets

1To use apps or widgets

1. Select

2. Select App List ( ).
u The apps screen appears.
3. Select the app or widget you want to use.

App List
(

) Icon

Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this
occurs, you need to reset the system.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 369
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all
the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 369
In case those apps still do not startup normally even
after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.
There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in
the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen
will return to before the browser startup.

Features

Preinstall app list:
• Browser: Displays the web browser utilized
by smartphone and Wi-Fi connection.
• Calculator: Displays Calculator.
• Gallery: Displays images.
• Downloads: Displays the data
downloaded from the web browser and so
on.
• App Installer: Check with a Honda dealer
for apps that are available for installation.
• Search: Displays various retrieval screen.

Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that
app’s or widget’s shortcut on the home screen.

Do not install apps other than those confirmed by a
Honda dealer. Installation of unauthorized apps may
introduce data corruption risks to your vehicle's
information and your privacy.
You can delete user installed apps by the following
procedure.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Select
.
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Detail Information.
Select an App that you want to delete.
Select Delete.

Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted.
Continued

271

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

272 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ To add app or widget icons on the home screen
App or widget icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Select
.
2. Select .

Features

3. Select and hold empty space on the home
screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select and hold.

4. Select Add App or Add Widget.
u The apps/widget screen appears.

272

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

273 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

5. Select and hold an app or widget icon you
want to add.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
Select and hold.

Features

6. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
7. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Drag and drop.

Continued

273

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ To move icons on the home screen
You can change location on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.

Select and hold.

Features

2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Drag and drop.

274

* Not available on all models

1To move icons on the home screen
You can also move the Phone, Info, Audio,
Settings, Navigation *, HondaLink, Smartphone
Connection, App List ( ), and Instrument Panel
icons in the same manner.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ To remove icons on the home screen

1To remove icons on the home screen

You can delete the icons on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.

You cannot delete the Phone, Info, Audio,
Settings, Navigation *, HondaLink, Smartphone
Connection, App List ( ), and Instrument Panel
icons.
Apps or widgets will not be deleted by deleting the
icon on the home screen.

Select and hold.

* Not available on all models

Continued

Features

Drag and drop to
trash icon.

2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove
to the trash icon.
u The icon is removed from the home
screen.
3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.

275

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

276 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Status Area
1. Swipe the upper area of the screen.
u The status area appears.
Swipe

Features

2. Select an item to see the details.
3. Select
or swipe up the bottom bar to
close the area.

Status Area

276

Bar

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Changing the Screen Interface

1Changing the Screen Interface

You can change the screen interface design.
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab.
5. Select Change Skin.
6. Select Next, then a confirmation message
appears on the screen. Select Yes.

After changing the screen interface design, you can
change the wallpaper by following procedure.
1. Select
.
2. Select .
3. Select and hold empty space on the home screen.
The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Change wallpaper.
5. Select Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.
If you change the screen interface, some of the
setting items will change.
2 Customized Features P. 337
Features

Continued

277

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Menu Customize

1Menu Customize

You can change menu icons on the right side of Audio, Phone, and Info screen.
1. Select any of the three icons (Audio/
Menu Icons
Phone/Info) on the screen, then select and
hold the menu icon.
u Selecting the
or
icon, you can
change
Audio,
Phone,
or Info on the
Select and hold
Menu Customize screen.

Features

To change

Menu Icon

2. Select and hold the menu icon you want to
change, then drag and drop the icon to the
bottom.

Drag and drop

3. Select and hold the menu icon you want to
add, then drag and drop the icon above.
4. Select OK.

To add

Drag and drop

278

You can also use the method below to change the
menu icon:
Select Settings System Home tab Menu Icon
Position

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Closing Apps

1Closing Apps

You can close specific apps running in the background on the system.
1. Select and hold
.
2. Select the Active tab.
u If you select the Active/History tab, you
can close the apps that are currently
running and delete the app activity
history simultaneously.
3. Select an app you want to close.

* Not available on all models

To close all apps on the system, select Clear All, then
Yes.
You cannot close the HondaLink® and Garmin * apps.

Features

4. Select Clear.
u The display will return to the app list.

If you have a number of apps running in the
background and something goes wrong with the
audio system, some of those apps may not work
properly. If this happens, close all the apps and relaunch the app/apps that you want to use.

279

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound
1. Select
.
2. Select MENU.
3. Select Sound.

Features

280

Select a tab from the following choices:
• BAS-MID-TRE: Bass, Middle, Treble
• FAD-BAL-SUBW: Fader, Balance,
Subwoofer
• SVC: Speed Volume Compensation

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness

1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Display Settings.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.

Features

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Background Color.
6. Select Next, then select the setting you
want.
7. Select OK.

Continued

281

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

■ Selecting an Audio Source
Select the source icon.

1Selecting an Audio Source

Source Select Screen

Source List Icons
Features

Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the
audio source.

■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

282

If you startup preinstalled audio apps,
is
displayed on the screen.
These preinstalled apps cannot be displayed on the
source select screen.
You can startup those audio apps from
.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation.
The voice control system uses the
(Talk) and
(hang-up/back) buttons on
the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

1Voice Control Operation

■ Voice Recognition

1Voice Recognition

* Not available on all models

Continued

The voice control system can only be used from the
driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
noises from the front passenger’s side.

Features

To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
• Close the windows and moonroof *.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
• Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.

When you press the
button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.

283

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Voice Portal Screen

Features

When the
(Talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice
Help” after the beep or select Voice Help.
You can see the list of commands in Voice
Info on the Info Menu screen. Select Info,
then select MENU.
The system only recognizes the commands
on the following pages, at certain screens.
Free form voice commands are not
recognized.

■ Phone Call

■ Audio*1

This can be only used when the phone is
connected. When the system recognizes the
Phone call command, the screen will
change to the voice recognition screen for
phone commands.
• Dial by number
• Call history
• Redial
• Call
• Call
• Call Police
• Call 911
Phone Call commands are not available if
using Apple CarPlay TM.

When the system recognizes the Audio
command, the screen will change to the
audio voice recognition screen.
• Audio On/Off
• Radio FM/AM/SXM *
• PANDORA *
• iPod
• USB
• Other Sources
Pandora® * cannot be used while Android
AutoTM is active.

284

* Not available on all models

The screen changes to the navigation
screen.

■ Music Search
This can be only used when the iPod or USB
device is connected.

■ HondaLink

■ Climate Control*1

This can be only used when the phone is
connected.

When the system recognizes the Climate
Control command, the screen will change
the dedicated screen to the climate control
voice recognition screen.
2 Climate Control Commands*1 P. 286

*1: Models with navigation system

■ Navigation*1
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

■ Voice Setting
The screen changes to the Voice Recog.
tab on the System Settings screen.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

285 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Voice Help
You can see a list of the available
commands on the screen.
• Useful Commands
• Phone Commands
• Audio Commands
• Climate Control Commands
• General Commands
• Music Search Commands
• On Screen Commands

The system accepts these commands on the
voice portal top screen.
• Call
• Call
• What time is it?
• What is today’s date?

The system accepts these commands on the
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
of the phone.
• Call by number
• Call by name
• Call
• Call

• SXM channel
• Radio SXM preset <1-12>

■ Pandora® Commands *
• PANDORA play

■ iPod Commands

The system accepts these commands on the
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
of the audio.

•
•
•
•
•

■ Radio FM Commands

■ USB Commands

■ Audio Commands*1

• Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
• Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8>
FM
• Radio FM preset # (#:1-12)

■ Radio AM Commands
• Radio tune to <530-1710> AM
• Radio AM preset # (#:1-6)

■ Radio SXM Commands *
• SXM channel <1-999>

•
•
•
•
•

iPod play
iPod play track # (#:1-30)
Music Search
What album is this?
What am I listening to?

Features

■ Useful Commands

■ Phone Commands

USB play
USB play track # (#:1-30)
Music Search
What album is this?
What am I listening to?

■ Bluetooth® audio Commands
• Bluetooth audio play
NOTE:
Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work
on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio
devices.

*1: Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models

Continued

285

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

286 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ On Screen Commands
When On Screen Commands is selected,
the explanation screen is displayed.

■ Music Search Commands
The system accepts these commands on the
Music Search screen.

■ Using Song By Voice
Song By Voice is a feature that allows you
to select music from your iPod or USB device
using Voice Commands. To activate this
mode, you must press the
(Talk) button
and say: “Music search”.
TM

Features

■ Song By Voice Commands
•
•
•
•
•
•

What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?

*1: Models with navigation system

286

■ Play Commands
•
•
•
•
•
•

Play artist
Play track/song
Play album
Play genre/category
Play playlist
Play composer

■ List Commands
•
•
•
•
•

List artist
List album
List genre/category
List playlist
List composer

■ General Commands
• What time is it?
• What is today’s date?

■ Climate Control Commands*1
• Climate Control On
• Climate Control Off
• Fan Speed <1-7>
• Temperature max heat
• Temperature max cool
• Temperature <57-87> degrees (U.S.)
• Temperature <18-32> degrees (Canada)
• Defrost On
• Defrost Off
• Air conditioner On
• Air conditioner Off
• More
• Vent
• Dash and floor
• Floor vents
• Floor and Defrost
• Climate Control Automatic
• Fan Speed up/down
• Temperature up
• Temperature down
NOTE:
These commands toggle the function on
and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

287 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

Driver Information Interface

Audio/Information Screen

Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.

(Audio) Icon
Select to display the audio screen.

VOL/
AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.

Features

Scan Icon
Select to scan each station with a
strong signal.

Seek Icons
Select
or
to search the
selected band up or down for a
station with a strong signal.

Tune Icons
Select
or
to tune
the radio frequency.

Preset Icons
Tune the preset radio frequency. Select and hold the
preset icon to store that station. Select
to display
preset 7 onwards.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
Continued

287

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Preset Memory
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
You can also store a preset station by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Features

■ Station List
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select the station.

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select Refresh.

288

1Preset Memory
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 233
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
preset memory.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license
from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, select Cancel or
.
Models with HD RadioTM

■ HD Subchannel

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

1Radio Data System (RDS)

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select the station.

Features

Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to
an FM station.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select HD Radio Subchannel.
3. Select the channel number.

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select Refresh.

Continued

289

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

290 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select View Radio Text.

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
To turn off scan, select Cancel or

Features

290

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

291 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

Playing SiriusXM® Radio *

Driver Information Interface

Channel Icons
Select
or
to the previous
or next channel.
Select and hold to rapidly skip 10
channels at a time.

Category Icons
Select
or
to display and select a
SiriusXM® Radio category.
Scan Icon
Select to scan each channel.
(Audio) Icon
Select to display the audio screen.

Features

Audio/Information Screen
Station Art
Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.

VOL/
AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous display.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
* Not available on all models

Skip Icons
Select
or
to change
section in the channel. Select and
hold to move rapidly within the
section.

Preset Icons
Tune the preset radio station. Select
and hold the preset icon to store that
station. Select
to display preset 7
onwards.

Continued

291

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ To Change the Tune Mode
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Tune Mode.
3. Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio *
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.

Features

SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,
which can take about a minute. Once they have
loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make
your selections.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 233
Tune Start:
When you change to a preset channel, a song being
played on that channel restarts from the beginning
with this function. This can be turned on or off from
the Audio Settings screen.
2 Customized Features P. 337

292

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Preset Memory

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio *
You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset
memory.

To store a channel:
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Press and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
3. Select OK.
You can also store a channel by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.

1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)

You can store up to five of your preferred music channels in total.
1. Tune a station.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel.
u A message appears if there are no
available presets.
5. Select Combine.

* Not available on all models

Continued

To store a multi-channel preset, you need to setup
the Multiple Channel Mix Preset setting to On.
2 Customized Features P. 337

Features

■ Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)

293

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Listening to Featured Channels
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a channel list.
2. Select the Channel tab.
3. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to.
u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
4. Select the channel.

Features

294

1Listening to Featured Channels
Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be
displayed.
Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel
list.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Replay Function

1Replay Function

The system can record up to the last 60 minutes of your currently tuned channel’s
broadcast, as well as the last 30 minutes of your preset channel’s broadcast, starting
from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to a preset channel, the
system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You
can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Playback.
3. Move the time marker to the position you want to replay.

You can no longer replay any program once the
power mode is turned off as it erases memory.
You can check how long the program has been
stored in memory from the audio/information screen.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will
automatically start deleting the oldest data.
Audio/Information Screen
(A)

Features

The following items are available on the pop-up screen:
(Skip Down): Skips to the previously stored channel. Select and hold to fastrewind the current selection.
(Skip Up): Skips to the next channel. Select and hold to fast-forward the
current selection.
(15sec Back): Select to skip back 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and
hold to fast-rewind the current selection.
(15sec Skip): Select to skip forward 15 seconds in the current selection. Select
and hold to fast-forward the current selection.
u Select OK to close the pop-up menu. Replay in playback mode continues.

The system starts storing broadcast in memory when
the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to
the program from that point.

(B)

(C)
(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is
behind the real-time broadcast
(B): Replayed segment
(C): Length stored in memory

To play or pause on playback mode:
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Play/Pause.

■ Returning to real-time broadcast
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Go to Live.
Continued

295

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Live Sports Alert

1Live Sports Alert

While listening to other channels, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from
the games of your favorite teams.

■ To set up a favorite team

1To set up a favorite team

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select SportsFlash Setup.
5. Select Favorite Team.
6. Select a team.
Features

■ To set up an alert message
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select SportsFlash Setup.
5. Select Interrupt.
6. Select On(One Time) or On(Continue).

296

The sports alert function is available in SiriusXM®
mode only.

Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on.
Selecting On(One Time) from the customize settings
disables the alert feature next time you turn the
power mode to ON.
2 Customized Features P. 337
You can also set up a favorite team by the following
procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select MENU.
3. Select Setting.
4. Select SportsFlash Setup.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ To set up an alert beep
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select SportsFlash Setup.
5. Select Interrupt Beep.
6. Select On.

■ Traffic and Weather Information

■ Scan
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds.
1. Select Scan.
2. Select Scan Channels.
u You can select the desired channel by songs using Scan Song in Preset.
To turn off scan, select Cancel.

You can also set up a alert beep by the following
procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select MENU.
3. Select Setting.
4. Select SportsFlash Setup.

1Traffic and Weather Information
The traffic and weather information function at
SiriusXM® mode only.
You can also set up the traffic and weather
information by the following procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select MENU.
3. Select Setting.
4. Select Traffic & Weather Setup.

Features

You can receive traffic and weather information.
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
5. Select the region.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unregistered.

1To set up an alert beep

1Scan
The “Scan Songs in Preset” function is based on
TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®.
The “Featured Channels” function is based on
Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®.
TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.

297

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231

Driver Information Interface

Features
(Audio) Icon
Select to display the audio screen.

Audio/Information Screen

(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.

Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.

VOL/
AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Song Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

298

Play/Pause Icon
Cover Art

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1Playing an iPod

1. Select MENU and select Music Search.

Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 327

Category
Selection

2. Select the items on that menu.

If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlayTM, the
iPod/USB source is unavailable and audio files on the
phone can only be played within Apple CarPlayTM.

Features

If you operate any music app on your iPhone/iPod
while the phone is connected to the audio system,
you may no longer be able to operate the same app
on the audio/information screen.
Reconnect the device if necessary.

Item Selection

Continued

299

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.
Select a play mode.

Features

300

■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in
random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in
random order.
Repeat: Repeats the current track.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice
commands.

1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Setting options:

• On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands

■ To enable SBV

are available.

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog. tab.
5. Select Song by Voice.
6. Select Next, then select On or Off.

• Off: Disable the feature.

Features

Continued

301

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

■ Searching for music using SBV

1Searching for music using SBV

Features

1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On.
2. Press the
(Talk) button and say “Music
Search” to activate the SBV feature for the
USB flash drive and iPod.
3. Then, say a next command.
u Example 1: Say “(List)‘Artist A’”to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the
desired song to start playing.
u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’” to start
playing songs by that artist.
4. To cancel SBV, press the
(hang-up/
back) button on the steering wheel. The
selected song continues playing.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need
to press the
button and say “Music
Search” again to re-activate this mode.

302

Song By VoiceTM Commands List
2 Song By Voice Commands P. 286
NOTE:
Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks
stored on the USB flash drive or iPod.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult
words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,
songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 303
SBV is not available when using Apple CarPlayTM. Use
Siri® Eyes Free instead.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

■ Phonetic Modification

1Phonetic Modification

Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV
to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when
searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod.
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog. tab.
5. Select Song by Voice Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select New Modification.

Song by Voice Phonetic Modification is grayed
out when Song By Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification
items.

Features

7. Select USB or iPod.

Continued

303

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

304 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

8. Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist).
u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.
9. Select an entry to modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
u To listen to the current phonetic
modification, select Play.
u To delete the current phonetic
modification, select Delete.

Features

10.Select Modify.
11.Select the phonetic spelling you want to
use (e.g., “Artist A”) when prompted.

12.Select Done.
u The artist “No Name” is phonetically
modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV
mode, you can press the
(Talk) button
and use the voice command “Play ‘Artist
A’” to play songs by the artist “No
Name.”

304

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora® *

Playing Pandora® *
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a
compatible smartphone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using
your USB cable to the USB port.
2 Phone Setup P. 404
2 USB Port(s) P. 231

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is
only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora
website for more information.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.

Driver Information
Interface

(Audio) Icon
Select to display the
audio screen.
Audio/Information
Screen

(Back) Icon
Select to go back to
the previous display.

Station Up/
Down Icons
Select to change
a station.

Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a track.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a track.
Skip Icon
Select to skip a track.

Features

Cover Art

VOL/
AUDIO
(Volume/Power
Audio) Knob
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.

1Playing Pandora® *

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
If your phone is connected to Android AutoTM,
Pandora® is only available through the Android
AutoTM interface. Visit the Android AutoTM website to
check compatibility.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
* Not available on all models

Continued

305

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora® *

■ Pandora® Menu

1Pandora® Menu

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Bookmark
• Station List
• New Station
• Switch USB device
• Sound
• Setting

■ Operating a menu item
Features

1. Select MENU.
2. Select an item.

306

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231

Driver Information Interface

Features

(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
(Audio) Icon
Select to display the audio screen.

Audio/Information Screen

VOL/
AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and
off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Folder Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder, and

Open/Close Icon*2
Displays/hides the detailed
information.

to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

Track Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly within
a track.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
Continued

307

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1. Select MENU and select Music Search.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 332
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 327

Folder Selection
Features

2. Select a folder.

Track Selection

3. Select a track.

308

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
■ Scan
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Scan.
3. Select a play mode.

Select a play mode.

Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
Random/Repeat
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

Features

■ Random/Repeat

1How to Select a Play Mode

■ To turn off a play mode
To turn off Scan, select
or Cancel.
To turn off Random or Repeat, select the mode you want to turn off.

309

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible.
To check if your phone is compatible, visit
http://www.handsfreelink.com/Honda/.
It may be illegal to perform some data device
functions while driving.

Driver Information
Interface
Features

(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the
previous display.
(Audio) Icon
Select to display
the audio screen.
VOL/
AUDIO
(Volume/Power
Audio) Knob
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Play Icon

Audio/
Information
Screen
Bluetooth
Indicator
Appears when
your phone is
connected to
HFL.
Open/Close
Icon*1
Displays/hides
the detailed
information.
Track Icons
Select
or
to change tracks.
Group Icons
Select
or
to change group.
Pause Icon

*1:Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not
be displayed.

310

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.
The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be
different.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there may be a delay before the system begins to
play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some
devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlayTM
or Android AutoTM, Bluetooth® Audio from that
phone is unavailable. However, a second previously
paired phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by
selecting Connect
from the Bluetooth Device
List screen.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to the system.

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.

2 Phone Setup P. 404

2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
You can change the connected phone in the
Bluetooth® settings on the Audio Menu screen by
the following procedure.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Setting.

Select the play icon or pause icon.

■ Searching for Music

1Searching for Music

1. Select MENU.
2. Select Music Search.
3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
4. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.

Features

■ To pause or resume a file

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

311

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect
your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 317
2 Phone Setup P. 404

■ HondaLink® Menu

1HondaLink®
The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most
iPhone and Android phones.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
If Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM is enabled,
HondaLink® can be accessed without the need to
connect to Wi-Fi.

Features

■ Places *
Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealers, etc. and provides navigation
instructions to those locations via the navigation system.

■ Vehicle
Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.

■ Help & Support
Displays tips on vehicle usage and provides information on roadside assistance and
the customer service center.

312

* Not available on all models

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

313 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

■ Messages from Honda
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.

■ Weather *
Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can
change the ZIP Code at any time.

■ To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service
Use the following procedure to connect to the HondaLink® service.

■ To enable the HondaLink® service
Features

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Info.
4. Select the HondaLink tab.
5. Select Diagnostics & Location Data.
6. Select On.

To complete the procedure, you must consent
to the collection and transmission of data
pertaining to your vehicle.
Enable once: Allows only one time. (Prompt
shows again next time.)
Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
* Not available on all models

Continued

313

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

314 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

■ To link with HondaLink®
You can see this screen after launching
HondaLink®.

Features

314

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

315 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

■ Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
Using the shortcut operation, you can quickly gain access to new messages.
1. In the header area, a message appears to
notify you of a new message.
u When the message is received, a
notification ring can be heard.

Message Icon

Continued

Features

2. The notification message is replaced by an
icon which remains displayed until the new
message is read.

315

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

3. From the top of the screen, swipe down to
see the messages.

Features

316

4. Select a new message to open.
u If you have selected the update option
for HondaLink®, follow the directions on
the screen to complete the process.

1Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
When you update HondaLink®, you must keep the
engine running and maintain a constant connection
with HondaLink®.
If the update is interrupted, the system will
automatically resume the process. If, however, a
week has elapsed since the process was first
interrupted, you must repeat the process from the
beginning.
You can update HondaLink® by selecting Message
from Honda on the HondaLink® menu.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
You can connect the Display Audio to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites
or use online services on the audio/information screen. If your phone has wireless
hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following
steps to setup.

■ Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)

1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)

Continued

You cannot go through the setting procedure while a
vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the
Wi-Fi connection.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone
has Wi-Fi connectivity.

Features

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth / Wi-Fi.
4. Select the Wi-Fi tab.
5. Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, select Next,
then On.
6. Select Yes.
7. Select Wi-Fi Device List.
u Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is
in access point (tethering) mode.
u Select the phone you want to connect to
the system.
u If you do not find the phone you want to
connect in the list, select Scan.
8. Select Add.
u If needed, enter a password for your
phone and select Done.
u When the connection is successful, the
icon is displayed on the top of the
screen.
9. Select
to go back to the home screen.

You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or
off with the
icon on the Wi-Fi Device List
screen. Network speed will not be displayed on this
screen.

317

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

■ Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
Make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.

Features

318

1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
iPhone users

You may need to go through an initial setup for WiFi connection again after you boot your phone.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free

Siri® Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the
(Talk) button on the steering wheel when your
iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

1Siri® Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.

2 Phone Setup P. 404
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri®
Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.

■ Using Siri® Eyes Free

1Using Siri® Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
Features

(Hang-up/back) Button
Press to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.

319

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

Apple CarPlayTM
If you connect an Apple CarPlayTM-compatible iPhone to the system via the 1.5A USB
port, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to
make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.

1Apple CarPlayTM
Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later
are compatible with Apple CarPlayTM.

2 USB Port(s) P. 231

■ Apple CarPlay

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to
Apple CarPlayTM and when launching any compatible
apps.

Menu
Apple CarPlayTM menu screen

Home screen

Features

: Go back to the
home screen
Apple CarPlayTM icon

Go back to the Apple
CarPlayTM menu screen

■ Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.

■ Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

■ Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.

To use Apple CarPlayTM, connect the USB cable to the
1.5A USB port. The USB port located on the back of
the center console compartment will not enable
Apple CarPlayTM operation.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231
To directly access the Apple CarPlayTM phone
function, select Phone on the home screen. While
connected to Apple CarPlayTM, calls are only made
through Apple CarPlayTM. If you want to make a call
with Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple
CarPlayTM OFF or detach the USB cable from your
iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM P. 321
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlayTM, it
is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other
previously paired phones can stream audio via
Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlayTM is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 404
For details on countries and regions where Apple
CarPlayTM is available, as well as information
pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

320

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

■ Maps

1Apple CarPlayTM

Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your
iPhone.
Models with navigation system

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlayTM) can give
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.

After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the 1.5A USB port, use the
following procedure to set up Apple CarPlayTM. Use of Apple CarPlayTM will result in
the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location,
speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlayTM experience. You
will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the Display Audio Screen.

■ Enabling Apple CarPlayTM
Enable once: Allows only once. (Prompt
shows again next time.)
Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under
the Smartphone settings menu.
Continued

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Apple
CarPlayTM functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Apple CarPlayTM functionality and
services. Honda cannot and does not provide any
warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlayTM
performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Apple CarPlayTM. Refer to the Apple
homepage for information on compatible apps.

Features

■ Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM

Apple CarPlayTM Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Apple CarPlayTM requires a compatible iPhone with an
active cellular connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.

1Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM
You can also use the method below to set up Apple
CarPlayTM:
Select HOME Settings Smartphone
Apple CarPlay
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlayTM
is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions
and Apple’s Privacy Policy.

321

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

■ Operating Apple CarPlayTM with Siri®
Press and hold the

(Talk) button to activate Siri®.

1Operating Apple CarPlayTM with Siri®
Below are examples of questions and commands for
Siri®.

• What movies are playing today?
• Call dad at work.
• What song is this?
• How’s the weather tomorrow?
• Read my latest email.
• Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit
www.apple.com/ios/siri.
Features

322

(Talk) button:
Press and hold to activate Siri®.
Press again to deactivate Siri®.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

Android AutoTM
When you connect an Android phone to the Display Audio system via the 1.5A USB
port, Android AutoTM is automatically initiated. When connected via Android
AutoTM, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google
Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first
use Android AutoTM, a tutorial will appear on the screen.
We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using
Android AutoTM.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 325

1Android AutoTM
To use Android AutoTM, you need to download the
Android AutoTM app from Google Play to your
smartphone.
Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are
compatible with Android AutoTM.
Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android AutoTM
phone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android
phone to Android AutoTM and when launching any
compatible apps.
Features

To use Android AutoTM, connect the USB cable to the
1.5A USB port. The USB port on the back of the
center console compartment will not enable Android
AutoTM operation.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231
When your Android phone is connected to Android
AutoTM, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.
However, other previously paired phones can stream
audio via Bluetooth® while Android AutoTM is
connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 404

Continued

323

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

■ Android AutoTM Menu

1Android AutoTM

: Go back to
the home screen

For details on countries and regions where Android
AutoTM is available, as well as information pertaining
to function, refer to the Android AutoTM homepage.
Android AutoTM Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Android AutoTM requires a compatible Android phone
with an active cellular connection and data plan.
Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Android AutoTM icon

Features

a Maps (Navigation)
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your
Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard
entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other
inputs.
Models with navigation system

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android AutoTM) can give
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
The audio/Information screen shows you turn-by turn driving directions to your
destination.
b Phone (Communication)
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
c Google Now (Home screen)
Display useful information organized by Android AutoTM into simple cards that
appear just when they’re needed.

324

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Android
AutoTM functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Android AutoTM functionality and
services. Honda cannot and does not provide any
warranty or guarantee of future Android AutoTM
performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Android AutoTM. Refer to the
Android AutoTM homepage for information on
compatible apps.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

d Music and audio
Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android AutoTM.
To switch between music apps, press this icon.
e Go back to the Home Screen.
f Voice
Operate Android AutoTM with your voice.

■ Auto Pairing Connection
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the 1.5A USB port, Android
AutoTM is automatically initiated.
1Enabling Android AutoTM

Enable once: Allows only once. (Prompt
shows again next time.)
Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under
the Smartphone settings menu.

Only initialize Android AutoTM when you safely
parked. When Android AutoTM first detects your
phone, you will need to set up your phone so that
auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction
manual that came with your phone.

Features

■ Enabling Android AutoTM

You can use the method below to change Android
AutoTM settings after you have completed the initial
setup:
Select HOME Settings Smartphone
Android Auto
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your phone by Android AutoTM is
governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy.

Continued

325

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

■ Operating Android AutoTM with Voice Recognition
Press and hold the

(Talk) button to operate Android AutoTM with your voice.

1Operating Android AutoTM with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with
voice recognition:
• Reply to text.
• Call my wife.
• Navigate to Honda.
• Play my music.
• Send a text message to my wife.
• Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android
AutoTM homepage.

Features

You can also activate the voice recognition function
by pressing the
icon in the upper-right corner of
the screen.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold to operate Android AutoTM with your voice.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
(Hang-up/back) button:
Press to deactivate voice recognition.

326

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

327 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Audio Error Messages
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message

Solution
Appears when there is a problem with the audio system. Check if the device is
compatible with the audio system.

The connected USB device has a problem.
See Owner’s Manual*2

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn
the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the
error.

Unsupported Ver*1
Unsupported Version*2

Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod
is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.

Connect Retry*1, *2

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

Unplayable File*1, *2

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported
format. This error message appears for about three seconds, then plays the next song.

Features

USB Error*1, *2

iPod

Appears when the iPod is empty.
No Song*1
No Data*2

USB flash drive

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, AAC, or WAV*1
files in the USB flash drive.
iPod and USB flash drive

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported*1, *2

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported
device is connected, reconnect the device.

*1:Models with color audio system
*2:Models with Display Audio
Continued

327

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

328 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive

Error Message
Device No Response*1

Appears when the system does not communicate with a connected device. If it appears
when a device is connected, contact your place of device purchase.

HUB Unsupported*1

Appears when only a HUB is connected. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the
HUB.

*1:Models with color audio system

Features

328

Solution

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

329 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora® *

Pandora® *
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Models with color audio system

Error Message

Solution
Appears when no device is connected.
Check the Bluetooth® and USB connection.

No Data

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.Reboot
the app and reconnect the device.

To begin listening, select a station from the stations list.

Appears when any station is not selected. Select a station from the
station list on the device.

PANDORA App version is not supported.

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora®
to the latest version.

No stations found. Please create a station.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to
create a station.

PANDORA system maintenance.

Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again later.

Unable to play PANDORA. When stopped, log-in to
PANDORA.

Appears you do not log in to Pandora®. Log in to Pandora®.

There is no internet connectivity on the phone.

Appears when the network is deteriorated. Move the vehicle and
check the reception of the signal.

Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again later.

Appears when the sending the data is failed for ten times and the
device may have a malfunction. Try again later. Move the vehicle and
check the reception of the signal.

* Not available on all models

Continued

Features

No Device Connected

329

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

330 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora® *

Error Message

Solution

PANDORA is unable to play music in this country.

Appears when the vehicle is in the restricted area to listen the music.
Move the vehicle and check the reception of the signal.

USB Error. Please check owners manual.

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. If there is any
problem with the connected device itself, the audio system may not
be able to detect it. Contact a dealer.

Models with Display Audio

Error Message

Solution

Features

To begin listening, select a station from the Stations list.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device
to create a station.

Unable to rate track. Please try again.
Skip limit reached.

Appears when you try to skip a song or select Like/Dislike over the
predetermined number of times in an hour.

Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again later.
Unable to retrieve a track explanation. Please try again later. Appears when the commanded operation fails. Try again later.
Unable to create bookmark. Please try again later.

330

No Data

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot
the app and reconnect the device.

PANDORA App version is not supported.

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora®
to the latest version.

Unable to complete the operation. Please try again later.

Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again
later.

uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps

Error Message

Solution
Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your device.

Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped, check your
mobile phone

Appears when Pandora® app is not installed on your device. Install
Pandora® app to your device.

Models with Display Audio

Android/Apps
If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Unfortunately, **** has
stopped.

Solution
Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.

Features

Error Message*1

App is not responding.
Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep
**** is not responding.
waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data
Would you like to close it?
Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 369

*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error
occurs.

331

General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service *
■ Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID on
the screen, select Channel 0.
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call SiriusXM® or visit the SiriusXM® website
to subscribe.

■ Receiving SiriusXM® Radio

Features

Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the ENTER button on the steering wheel, or
through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes
until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good
reception.

■ SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Channel Not Subscribed:
You are not subscribed to the channel selected.
Subscription Update:
SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
Channel Not Available:
No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable.
No Signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Antenna Disconnected:
The SiriusXM® antenna is disconnected. Contact a dealer.

332

* Not available on all models

1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
• U.S.: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or 1800-852-9696
• Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or
1-877-209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
• In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
• In tunnels
• On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
• Large items carried on the roof rack

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
■ iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model

1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.

iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2007 and 2012
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c*1/iPhone 5s*1/
iPhone 6*1/iPhone 6 Plus*1

■ USB Flash Drives
•
•
•
•
•

A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, or WAV * formats may be unsupported.

* Not available on all models

1USB Flash Drives

Features

*1:Models with Display Audio

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.

333

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

334 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM

Models with Display Audio

Legal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM
■ OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE
APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE
SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER
LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND
VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR
DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.
Features

334

USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN
THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE
DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED,
STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING,
FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS
SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE
POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF
DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

335 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM

■ DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY

Features

YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR
SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS
PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS,
EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED
TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR
AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST
AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE
PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE,
SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC.,
SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY
TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY
(CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED
BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING
LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

335

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses

About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps.
Models with color audio system

1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select License, then press .
Models with Display Audio

Features

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab.
5. Select Detail Information.
6. Select About device.
7. Select Legal information.
8. Select Open source licenses.

1About Open Source Licenses
LICENCE: Copyright © 2001 Bob Trower, Trantor
Standard Systems Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the “Software”), to
deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

336

Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
• Shift to (P .

Models with color audio system

■ How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w , press the
MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings,
press the
button, then select Phone Setup.
Audio/Information Screen
(Phone) Button

1How to customize
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.

Features

To customize other features, select Settings, rotate
, then press
.
2 List of customizable options P. 353

MENU/CLOCK Button

Selector Knob

Continued

337

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

338 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with color audio system

■ Customization Flow
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.

Adjust Clock

Settings

RDS Settings

RDS Information
Radio Text

Features

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device
Connect an Audio Device

Display Adjustment

Brightness
Contrast
Black Level

Rear Camera

338

Camera Guideline

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

339 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Display Change

Audio
Wallpaper

Wallpaper

Select
Import
Delete
Features

Color Theme

Blue
Red
Amber
Violet
Bluegreen

Language

Clock Format

12h
24h

License

Continued

339

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

340 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Press the

button and rotate

to select Phone Setup, then press

Bluetooth Setup

.
Add New Device
Connect a Phone
Connect an Audio Device
Disconnect All Devices
Delete Device
Pass-Key

Features

Speed Dial

Ringtone

Mobile Phone
Fixed

Caller ID Info

Name Priority
Number Priority

System Clear

340

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with color audio system

■ List of customizable options
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Adjust Clock.

Adjust Clock

—

2 Clock P. 132

RDS
Settings

Radio Text

Add New Device

Brightness
Display
Contrast
Adjustment
Black Level
Rear
Camera

—

2 Phone Setup P. 379

Connect an Audio
Device

Settings

Selects whether the RDS information comes
On*1/Off
on.
Displays the radio text information of the
selected RDS station.
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a code for a paired
phone.

Features

Bluetooth
Setup

RDS Information

Camera Guideline

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.
Changes the brightness of the audio/
information screen.
Changes the contrast of the audio/
information screen.
Changes the black level of the audio/
information screen.
Selects whether the guidelines come on the
audio/information screen.

—
—
—
—
On*1/Off

*1:Default Setting

Continued

341

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Display Change
Select
Wallpaper

Delete

Settings
Color Theme
Language
Features

Clock Format
License
*1:Default Setting

342

Import

Description
Changes the display type.
Changes the wallpaper type.

Selectable Settings
Audio*1/Wallpaper
Clock*1/Image 1/Image 2/
Image 3

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

—

2 Wallpaper Setup P. 240

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen.
Changes the display language.
Selects the digital clock display from 12H to
24H.
Shows the legal information.

Image 1 /Image 2/Image 3
Blue*1/Red/Amber/Violet/
Bluegreen
English*1/French/Spanish
*1

12h*1/24h
—

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Add New Device
Connect a Phone
Bluetooth
Setup

Phone
Setup

Ringtone
Caller ID Info
System Clear

Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 379

Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone
to HFL.

Selectable Settings
—
—

2 Phone Setup P. 379

Connect an Audio
Device
Disconnect All Devices
Delete Device
Pass-Key

Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL.

—

Disconnects a paired phone from HFL.
Deletes a paired phone.
Inputs and changes a code for a paired phone.
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

—
—
—

2 Speed Dial P. 387

—

Selects the ring tone.
Mobile Phone*1/Fixed
Prioritizes the caller’s name or phone number Name Priority*1/Number
as the caller ID.
Priority
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
—
Phone Setup group as default.

Features

Speed Dial

Description

*1:Default Setting

Continued

343

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with Display Audio

1Customized Features

■ How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, select
Settings, then select a setting item.

, and

When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
• Shift to (P .
To customize other features, select Settings.
2 List of customizable options P. 353

Features

344

Audio/Information Screen

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

345 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with Display Audio

■ Customization flow
Select Settings.

Clock

Info

HondaLink
Others
Default
Clock

HondaLink
Others
Default

Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/Clock Type*2
Clock Adjustment
Auto Time Zone *
Manual Time Zone *
Auto Daylight Saving Time
Clock Format
Clock Display
Overlay Clock Location
Clock Reset
Diagnostic & Location Data
Info Screen Preference

Clock
Wallpaper

Features

Clock

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
*2: Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models

Continued

345

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

346 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Camera

Rear Camera
LaneWatch *

Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Show with Turn Signal
Display Time after Turn Signal Off
Reference Line
Default

Cross Traffic
Monitor *

Features

Bluetooth / Wi-Fi

Bluetooth

Wi-Fi

Bluetooth On/Off Status
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Wi-Fi On/Off Status
Wi-Fi Device List
Wi-Fi Information

Default
Phone

Phone

Text/Email

Default

346

* Not available on all models

Bluetooth Device List
Edit Speed Dial
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
HondaLink Assist
Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Message Notification

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

347 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Audio

FM/AM

HD Radio Mode (FM) *
HD Radio Mode (AM) *
RDS INFO

SXM *

TuneStart
SportsFlash Setup
Traffic & Weather Setup
Multiple Channel Mix Preset
Bluetooth Device List

Other

Cover Art
Audio Source Pop-Up

Features

Bluetooth

Default

* Not available on all models

Continued

347

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

348 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

System

Home

Display

Features

Sound/Beep

*1 : Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
*2 : Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

348

Home Screen Edit Order
Menu Icon Position*2
Configuration of Instrument Panel
Tachometer Setting
Display Settings
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Background Color*1
Blue
Amber
Red
Violet
BlueGreen
Touch Panel Sensitivity
Guidance Volume
Text Message Volume
Voice Recog. Volume
Meter Volume - List Reading
Meter Volume - Alphabetic Reading
Verbal Reminder
Beep Volume

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

349 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Voice Recog.

Clock

One Press Voice Operation
Voice Prompt
Voice Recog. Volume
Song by Voice
Song by Voice Phonetic Modification
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Automatic Phone Sync
Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/
Clock Type*2

Clock
Wallpaper
Features

Clock Adjustment
Auto Time Zone *
Manual Time Zone *
Auto Daylight Saving Time
Clock Format
Clock Display
Overlay Clock Location
Clock Reset

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
*2: Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models

Continued

349

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

350 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Others

Features

Default

*1 : Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

350

Language
Voice Command Tips
Remember Last Screen*1
Memory Refresh
Refresh Time Adjustment
Swipe Direction
4way Switch Gesture
Volume Gestures
Change Skin
Factory Data Reset
Climate Screen Timeout
Detail Information

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

351 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Vehicle

TPMS Calibration *
Driver Assist System Setup *

Cancel
Calibrate
Forward Collision Warning Distance
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Blind Spot Info
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Driver Attention Monitor
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Adjust Alarm Volume
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Turn By Turn Auto Display
New Message Notifications
Speed/Distance Units
Tachometer

Driving Position Setup *

Memory Position Link

Features

Meter Setup

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models

Continued

351

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

352 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Keyless Access Setup *

Lighting Setup

Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Walk Away Auto Lock

Power Tailgate Setup

Hands-free Access Mode
Keyless Open Mode
Power Open By Outer Handle

Features

Door/Window Setup

Maintenance Info.
Default
Smartphone

352

* Not available on all models

Remote Start System On/Off
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity
Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON

Apple CarPlay
Android Auto

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with Display Audio

■ List of customizable options
Setup Group

Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type*1/Clock
Type*2

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock
Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment
Auto Time Zone *
Manual Time Zone *
Auto Daylight Saving Time
Clock

Features

Clock

See Info on P. 354

Clock Format
Clock Display
Overlay Clock Location
Clock Reset
HondaLink

Diagnostic & Location Data

Others

Info Screen Preference

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Clock settings group as default.

Yes/No

*1:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
*2:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.
* Not available on all models

Continued

353

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

354 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type*2/
Clock
Type*3

Features

354

Info

Clock

Description
Changes the clock display type.
●

Wallpaper

●
●

Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Selectable Settings
Analog/Digital*1/
Small Digital/Off
Blank/Galaxy*1/
Metallic/Time Zone

Clock Adjustment

Adjusts Clock.

—

Auto Time Zone *

Automatically adjusts the clock when driving
through different time zones.

Manual Time Zone *

Changes the time zone manually.

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust
the clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to
cancel this function.

On*1/Off

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

12H*1/24H

Clock Display

Selects whether the clock display comes on.

On*1/Off

Overlay Clock Location

Changes the clock display layout.

Upper Right*1/Upper
Left/Lower Right/
Lower Left/Off

Clock Reset

Resets the clock settings to the factory default.

Yes/No

On*1/Off
—

Clock

*1:Default Setting
*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
*3:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.
* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
HondaLink

Info

Others

Description

Selectable Settings

Turns HondaLink® on and off.

On*1/Off

Info Screen
Preference

Selects the top menu when the
(display/
information) button is pressed.
● Info Top- A brief menu pops up.
● Info Menu- A full menu pops up.
● Off- A menu does not pop up.

Info Top/Info
Menu*1/Off

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info settings
group as default.

Yes/No

Default

Fixed Guideline

Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear
camera monitor.

Features

Diagnostic &
Location Data

On*1/Off

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 531

Rear
Camera

Dynamic Guideline

Selects whether the guidelines adjust to the movement
of the steering wheel.

On*1/Off

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 531

Camera
Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear Camera
setting group as default.

Yes/No

Show with Turn
Signal

Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on when
you move the turn signal lever to indicate a right turn.

On*1/Off

Display Time after
Turn Signal Off

Changes the length of time the LaneWatch display stays
on after the turn signal lever returns to the center.

0 second*1/2 seconds

LaneWatch *

*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models

Continued

355

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Selectable Settings

Reference Line

Selects whether the reference lines come on
the LaneWatch monitor.

On*1/Off

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.

Yes/No

Cross Traffic Monitor *

Turns on and off the cross traffic monitor.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth On/Off Status

Changes the Bluetooth® status.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone.

LaneWatch
Camera

Features

Bluetooth

Bluetooth /
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi

Default
*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

—

2 Phone Setup P. 404

Edit Pairing Code

356

Description

Edits a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 405

Random/Fixed*1

Wi-Fi On/Off Status

Changes the Wi-Fi mode.

Wi-Fi Device List

Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi
device.

—

Wi-Fi Information

Shows the Wi-Fi information of the head unit.

—

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Bluetooth / Wi-Fi group as default.

On/Off*1

Yes/No

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Bluetooth Device List

Description

Selectable Settings

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 404

Edit Speed Dial
Phone

Selects the ring tone.

Fixed/Mobile
Phone*1

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets a phonebook and call history data to be
automatically imported when a phone is paired
to HFL.

On*1/Off

HondaLink Assist

Turns HondaLink Assist on and off.

On*1/Off

Enable Text/Email

Turns the text/e-mail message function on and
off.

On*1/Off

Select Account

Selects a text or e-mail message account.

New Message Notification

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail
message.

On/Off*1

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
settings group as default.

Yes/No

Features

Default

—

2 Speed Dial P. 410

Ring Tone

Phone

Text/Email

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

—

*1:Default Setting

Continued

357

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

FM/AM mode

Description

Selectable Settings

HD Radio Mode (FM) *
HD Radio Mode (AM) *

Selects whether the audio system automatically
switches to the digital radio waves or receives
the analog waves only.

Auto*1/Analog only

RDS INFO

Turns on and off the RDS information.

On*1/Off

TuneStart

Turns on and off, starts the song from the
beginning as you change preset stations.

On*1/Off

Interrupt

Turns on and off the sports alert function.

Off*1/On(One Time)/
On(Continue)

Favorite
Team

Selects your favorite sports teams.

Interrupt
Beep

Causes the system to beep when the sports alert
is notified.

FM/AM

Features

Audio
SiriusXM® mode

SXM *

*1:Default Setting

358

* Not available on all models

SportsFlash
Setup

—

2 Live Sports Alert P. 296

Traffic & Weather Setup

Selects the region you want to receive the
information.

Multiple Channel Mix
Preset

Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off.

On*1/Off
—
On*1/Off

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Bluetooth® mode

Bluetooth

Bluetooth Device List

Description

Selectable Settings

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 404
iPod or USB mode

Audio

Other

[Your selected media]
Cover Art
Audio Source Pop-Up

System

On*1/Off

Selects whether the list of selectable audio source
comes on when Audio is selected on the home
screen.

On/Off*1

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
settings group as default.

Yes/No

Features

Default

Turns the cover art display on and off.

Home Screen Edit Order

Changes the home screen icon layout.

—

Menu Icon Position*2

Changes the position of the menu icons on the
Audio, Phone, and Info screen.

—

Configuration of
Instrument Panel

Changes the Instrument Panel screen icon
layout.

—

Tachometer Setting

Turns on and off the tachometer display.

Home

On*1/Off

*1:Default Setting
*2:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

Continued

359

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

360 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Display
Settings
Display

Features

System

Description

Selectable Settings

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.

—

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.

—

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.

—

Background Color*2

Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen.

Blue/Amber/Red/
Violet/BlueGreen*1

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen.

High/Low*1

Guidance Volume

Changes the sound volume.
Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation
system.

1~6*1~11

Text Message Volume

Changes the text/e-mail message reading
volume.

1~6*1~11

Sound/
Beep

*1:Default Setting
*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

360

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Sound/
Beep

Voice
Recog.

Selectable Settings

Voice Recog. Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

1~6*1~11

Meter Volume - List
Reading

Changes the list reading volume.

1~6*1~11

Meter Volume Alphabetic Reading

Changes the alphabetic reading volume.

1~6*1~11

Verbal Reminder

Turns the verbal reminders on and off.

On*1/Off

Beep Volume

Changes the beep volume.

Off/1/2*1/3

One Press Voice
Operation

Changes the setting of the
using the voice operation.

Voice Prompt

Turns the voice prompt on and off.

On*1/Off

Voice Recog. Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

1~6*1~11

Song by Voice

Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.

On*1/Off

Song by Voice
Phonetic Modification

Modifies a voice command for music stored in the system or
an iPod/iPhone.

Phonebook Phonetic
Modification

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets phonebook and call history data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

(Talk) button operation when

Features

System

Description

On*1/Off

—

2 Phonetic Modification P. 303

—

2 Phonetic Modification P. 303

On/Off

*1:Default Setting
Continued

361

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Clock/Wallpaper
Type*2/Clock
Type*3

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock
Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment
Auto Time Zone *
Clock

Manual Time Zone *

See Info on P. 354

Features

Auto Daylight Saving Time
System
Clock Format
Clock Display
Overlay Clock Location
Clock Reset
Others

Language

Change the display language.

*1:Default Setting
*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
*3:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

362

* Not available on all models

English (United
States)*1/Français/
Español

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Description

Selectable Settings

Voice Command Tips

Alerts you when manual control of the system is
disabled to prevent distraction while driving.
Only voice commands are available.

On*1/Off

Remember Last Screen*2

Selects whether the device remembers the last
screen.

On/Off*1

Memory Refresh

Turns on the audio system automatically and restores
the fragmentation of a memory when the power
mode is VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

On*1/Off

Refresh Time Adjustment

Sets the time for Memory Refresh.

Swipe Direction

Sets the vertical swipe direction on the audio remote
controls.

Normal*1/Invert

4way Switch Gesture

Turns the vertical swipe direction on the audio
remote controls on or off.

On*1/Off

Volume Gestures

Turns the volume swipe direction on the audio
remote controls on or off.

On*1/Off

Change Skin

Changes the screen interface design.

Yes/No

Others

Factory Data Reset

Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 369

Features

System

Customizable Features

—

Yes/No

*1:Default Setting
*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

Continued

363

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

364 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Description

Climate Screen
Timeout

Changes the length of time the climate control display
stays on when you press the CLIMATE button.

Detail Information

Displays the details of the head unit and operating
system information.

Selectable Settings
Never/5 Seconds/10
Seconds*1/20 Seconds

Others
System

Features

Vehicle

364

—

Default

Cancels /Resets all customized items in the System
group as default.

Yes/No

TPMS Calibration *

Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS).

Cancel*1/Calibrate

Forward Collision
Warning Distance

Changes CMBSTM alert distance.

Long/Normal*1/Short

ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a
vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC range.

On/Off*1

Blind Spot Info

Changes the setting for the blind spot information.

Audible and Visual
Alert*1/Visual Alert/Off

Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep

Causes the system to beep when LKAS is suspended.

On/Off*1

Road Departure
Mitigation Setting

Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation
system.

Normal*1/Wide/Warning
Only

Driver Attention
Monitor

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.

Tactile And Audible
Alert*1/Tactile Alert/OFF

Driver
Assist
System
Setup *

*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

365 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Meter
Setup

Description

Selectable Settings

Adjust Outside Temp.
Display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A
and average fuel economy A.

When Refueled/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B
and average fuel economy B.

When Refueled/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

Adjust Alarm Volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers,
warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.

High/Mid*1/Low

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

On*1/Off

Turn By Turn Auto
Display

Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on
during the route guidance.

On*1/Off

New Message
Notifications

Used to select whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail message.

On*1/Off

Speed/Distance Units

Selects the trip computer units.

mph · miles*1/km/h · km
(U.S.)
km/h · km*1/mph · miles
(Canada)

Tachometer

Selects whether the tachometer come on the driver
information interface.

On*1/Off

Features

Vehicle

Customizable Features

*1:Default Setting
Continued

365

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

366 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Driving
Position
Setup *

Features

Keyless
Access
Setup *
Vehicle

Lighting
Setup

Selectable Settings

Memory Position Link

Turns the driving position memory system on and
off.

On*1/Off

Remote Start System
On/Off

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.

On*1/Off

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.

Driver Door Only*1/All
Doors

Keyless Access Light
Flash

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you
unlock/lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock
the doors.

On*1/Off

Interior Light
Dimming Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.

60seconds/30seconds*1/
15seconds

Headlight Auto Off
Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver’s door.

60seconds/30seconds/
15seconds*1/0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Auto Interior
Illumination
Sensitivity

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the
instrument panel when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position.

Min/Low/Mid*1/High/Max

*1:Default Setting

366

Description

* Not available on all models

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

367 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Lighting
Setup

Description
Changes the settings for the wiper operation
when the headlights automatically come on while
the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

On*1/Off

Auto Door Lock

Used to change the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.

With Vehicle Speed/Shift
from P*1/Off

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.

All Doors When Driver’s
Door Opens*1/All Doors
When Shifted to Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off

Key and Remote
Unlock Mode

Sets up the driver’s door or all the doors to unlock
on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door*1/All Doors

Keyless Lock Answer
Back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

On*1/Off

Security Relock
Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock
the vehicle without opening any door.

90seconds/60seconds/
30seconds*1

Walk Away Auto
Lock

Changes the settings for the auto lock function
when you walk away from the vehicle.

On/Off*1

Features

Auto Headlight ON
With Wiper ON

Vehicle
Door/
Window
Setup

Selectable Settings

*1:Default Setting

Continued

367

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

368 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup Group

Customizable Features

Power
Tailgate
Setup *
Vehicle

Description

Selectable Settings

Hands-free Access
Mode

Changes the setting to open power tailgate by a
swift forward in and out kicking motion under
the rear bumper.

On*1/Off

Keyless Open Mode

Changes the keyless setting for when the power
tailgate opens.

Anytime*1/When
Unlocked

Power Open By Outer
Handle

Changes the setting to open power tailgate by
tailgate outer handle.

Off (Manual only)*1/
On (Power/Manual)

Features

Maintenance Info.

Used to reset the engine oil life display when the
maintenance service has been performed.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Vehicle
settings group as default.

Apple CarPlay

Sets up the Apple CarPlayTM connection.

—

Android Auto

Sets up the Android Auto

—

—
Yes/No

Smartphone

368

* Not available on all models

connection.

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Models with Display Audio

Defaulting All the Settings
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the
preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use
the HondaLink® because it becomes off line.
2 HondaLink® P. 312

Features

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab.
5. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen.
6. Select Next, then select Yes to reset the
settings.
7. Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select OK.
u After selecting OK, the system will
reboot.

369

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.

■ Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
Features

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path.

370

* Not available on all models

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

371 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink

Training HomeLink
Models without panoramic roof

Red Indicator

If it is necessary to erase a previously entered
learned code:
• Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator
blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to
step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.

Models with panoramic roof

Features

Red Indicator

The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but
may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener,
visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800)355-3515.

Continued

371

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink

■ Training a Button

1Training HomeLink
Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:

1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the
HomeLink button you want to program.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Hold the button on the remote
transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to
constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

YES

Features

3. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
button for about a sec.
Does the device (garage
door opener) work?

YES

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.

Press and release the HomeLink button. Press
and release the button on the remote every 2
secs.
Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from
slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly
blinking? The process should take less than 60
seconds.

4. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
Training
Complete

HomeLink LED is
constantly on.

5. Press and hold the HomeLink
button again.
The remote-controlled device
should operate.
Training Complete

372

HomeLink indicator rapidly blinks.
A. The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).

B. Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

Standard transmitter

Rolling code transmitter

Indicator remains on
for about 25 secs.

Indicator remains on for
about 25 secs.

2. Quickly release the HomeLink button and follow
steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.” You do not
need to press and release the HomeLink button
again in step 2.
Erasing Codes
To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside
buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink
(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes
before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device’s
instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call
HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528 -7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528 -7876.

Models with color audio system

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons

Voice control tips

Microphone

(Pick-up) Button

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

Volume up

Volume down
(Talk) Button
Selector Knob

Features

(Phone) Button

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak
clearly and naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

(Hang-up/Back) Button

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
(Phone) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press .

Continued

If you receive a call while using the audio system, the
system resumes its operation after ending the call.
Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is
no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 387
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call
history, Call History is disabled.

373

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display
Battery Level Status

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

The audio/information screen notifies you
when there is an incoming call.

Signal Strength
Roam Status
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
HFL Mode
Call Name

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.

Features

1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 337

■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while
the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 387

374

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.

1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.

Speed Dial*1

Add New
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.

Call History*1

Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.

Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook to
store as a speed dial number.

Phone Number

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.

Dialed Calls

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Received Calls

Display the last 20 incoming calls.

Missed Calls

Display the last 20 missed calls.

Phonebook*1

Display the paired phones’s phonebook.

Dial*1

Enter a phone number to dial.

Features

(Existing entry list)

Call History

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued

375

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

376 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Redial*1

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

Phone Setup

Features
*1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

376

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device

Pair a phone to the system.

Connect a Phone

Connect a phone to the system.

Connect an Audio Device

Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the
system.

Disconnect All Devices

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Delete Device

Delete a previously paired phone.

Pass-key

Create a code for a paired phone.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

377 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Speed Dial*1

Add New
Call History

Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.

Phone Number

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.
Features

Existing entry list
Change Speed Dial

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.

Change a previously stored speed dial
number.

Delete Speed Dial

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Store Voice Tag

Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Change Voice Tag

Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Delete Voice Tag

Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Continued

377

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

378 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Ringtone

Caller ID Info
Features
System Clear

378

Mobile Phone

Select the ring tone stored in the connected
cell phone.

Fixed

Select the ring tone stored in HFL.

Name Priority

Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.

Number Priority

Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the
caller ID.

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries,
and security codes.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

■ To pair a cell phone (No phone has

Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within 30 seconds, the system will
time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

Features

been paired to the system)
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
3. Press
to select OK.
4. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode.
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
5. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink®.

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.

6. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
7. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.

Continued

379

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

380 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)

Features

1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Add New Device,
then press
.
4. Press
to select OK.
u The screen changes to device list.
5. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press
.
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
6. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing
.
u If your phone does not appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink®.
7. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by a phone.

380

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

381 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To change the currently paired phone
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .

Features

4. Rotate
to select Connect a Phone,
then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.

5. Rotate
to select a desired device name,
then press .
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.

Continued

381

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

382 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .

4. Rotate
.

to select Pass-Key, then press

Features

5. Input a new pairing code, then press

382

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

383 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .

Features

4. Rotate
to select Delete Device, then
press .
u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .

6. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
.

Continued

383

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Ringtone, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Fixed or Mobile
Phone, then press .

Features

384

■ Caller’s ID Information
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming
call.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Caller ID Info, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select a mode you want, then
press .

1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.
Mobile Phone: For certain connected phones, the
ring tone stored in the phone sounds from the
speakers.

1Caller’s ID Information
Name Priority: A caller’s name is displayed if it is
stored in the phonebook.
Number Priority: A caller’s phone number is
displayed.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

385 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Clear the System
Pairing codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, all call
history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select System Clear, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .

Features

5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
.

6. A notification appears on the screen. Press
.

Continued

385

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to HFL.

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

Work

Voice

Features

Pager
If a name has four or more numbers, ... appears
instead of category icons.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.

386

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial

1Speed Dial
When any preset button is pressed, the Speed Dial
screen is displayed.
When a voice tag is stored, you can press the
button and call the number using voice commands.

Features

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Add New, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Phonebook:
u Select a number from the connected cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
From Phone Number:
u Input the number manually.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate
to select Yes or No,
then press .
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
say the name for the speed dial entry.

Continued

387

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

388 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To edit a speed dial
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Change Speed Dial,
then press .
6. Select a new speed dial number, then press
.
Features

388

■ To delete a speed dial number
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Delete Speed Dial,
then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Store Voice Tag, then
press .
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Change Voice Tag,
then press .
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

Continued

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

Features

■ To change a voice tag

1Speed Dial

389

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a voice tag
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
Features

■ Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.

390

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported

■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select
, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued

1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 374
2 Speed Dial P. 387

Features

phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook are automatically imported to
HFL.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then
press .
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate
to select the initial, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 374
2 Speed Dial P. 387

391

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Redial, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using redial

■ To make a call using the call history

Features

392

Call history is stored by Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

Press and hold the
button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s call history.

1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is
connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed,
received, or missed calls.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry
When any preset button is pressed, the Speed Dial
screen is displayed.
Select Others to view another paired phone’s speed
dial list.
When a voice tag is stored, press the
button and
call the number using voice commands.
2 Speed Dial P. 387

Continued

Features

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen. Press the
button and
follow the prompts.

393

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call
HFL Mode

1Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds and the Incoming Call
screen appears.
Press the
Press the
call.

Caller’s Name
Features

394

button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the

Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold
to answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the
and
buttons.
Rotate
to select the icon, then press
.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Options During a Call

Dial Tones: Available on some phones.

Features

The following options are available during a call.
Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the
button.
2. Rotate
to select the option, then press
.
u The check box is checked when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

1Options During a Call

395

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Models with Display Audio

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528 -7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528 -7876.

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons
3 4

Buttons
ENTER Button

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

Microphone

(+ (- Bar

Features

To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status
setting must be On. If there is an active connection to
Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM, HFL is
unavailable.
2 How to customize P. 337
Voice control tips

• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

(Display/Information) Button
(Talk) Button
(Hang-up/Back) Button
(Pick-up) Button

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press the
button when you want to call a
number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, select the audio
system’s VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio
controls on the steering wheel.
Up to three speed dial entries can be displayed
among a total of 20 that can be entered.
2 Speed Dial P. 410
Up to three previous calls can be displayed at a time
among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no
call history, Call History is disabled.

396

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

To go to the Phone Menu screen:

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
Features

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone menu on the driver
information interface, or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous
command, or cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal.
3 4 buttons: Press to select an item displayed on the phone menu in the driver
information interface.
ENTER button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the phone
menu in the driver information interface.
(display/information) button: Select and press ENTER to display Speed
Dial, Call History, or Phonebook on the phone menu in the driver information
interface.

1. Select
to switch the display to the phone screen.
2. Select MENU.

Continued

397

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display

1HFL Status Display

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth Indicator
Battery Level Status
HFL Mode

Appears when your phone is
connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

Caller’s Name

Caller’s Number
Features

■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or
numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 410

398

The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language.
2 How to customize P. 337

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.

■ Phone Settings screen
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Phone.

Some functions are limited while driving.

Features

Phone

Bluetooth Device List

Connect
Connect
Connect

(Existing entry list)

Disconnect
Delete
Add Bluetooth Device

Connect a paired device to
the system.
Disconnect a paired phone
from the system.
Delete a paired phone.

Pair a new phone to the system.

Continued

399

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

400 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Edit Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)

Edit

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
●
●
●

Delete
New Entry

Features
Delete All
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
HondaLink Assist

400

Manual Input

Change a name.
Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.

Import from Call History

Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.

Import from Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.

Delete all of the previously stored speed dial numbers.

Select the fixed or mobile phone.
Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

401 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Text/Email

Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Message Notification

Default

Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.
Select a mail or text message account.
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text/e-mail message.

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
Features
Continued

401

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

402 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Menu screen
1. Select
.
2. Select MENU.

Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)

Features

New Entry

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Manual Input
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook

Edit Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)
New Entry

Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Manual Input
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook

402

Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

403 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Phonebook

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Redial

Redial the last number dialed.

Dial

Enter a phone number to dial.

Call History

All
Dialed

Display the last outgoing calls.

Received

Display the last incoming calls.
Display the last missed calls.

(Existing message list)

Read/Stop

Features

Missed
Text/Email

Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.
See the previous message.
See the next message.

Dial

Select Account

Reply to a received message using one of six
fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.

Select a mail or text message account.

Continued

403

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no

Features

404

phone paired to the system)
1. Select
.
2. Select Yes.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then select Continue.
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
4. Select your phone when it appears on the
list.
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, search for
HandsFreeLink.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
the system before you can make and receive handsfree calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM,
pairing of additional Bluetooth-compatible devices is
unavailable and Add Bluetooth Device is grayed
out from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To change the currently paired phone
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 399

2. Select Bluetooth Device List.
3. Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
4. Select Connect
, Connect , or
Connect .

■ To change the pairing code setting

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is connected again.
To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device
from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

1To change the pairing code setting
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.

Features

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth / Wi-Fi.
4. Select the Bluetooth tab.
5. Select Edit Pairing Code.

1To change the currently paired phone

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.

6. Select Random or Fixed.

Continued

405

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 399

2. Select Bluetooth Device List.
3. Select a phone you want to delete.

Features

406

4. Select Delete.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options

1To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options

■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail
function
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

To use the text message/e-mail function, it may be
necessary to set up on your phone.

2 Phone Settings screen P. 399

2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable
Text/Email.
3. Select Next.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select On or Off.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 399

2. Select the Text/Email tab, then New
Message Notification.
3. Select Next.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select On or Off.

Continued

1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.

Features

■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice

407

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Ring Tone

1Ring Tone

You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 399

2. Select Ring Tone.
3. Select Next, then select Fixed or Mobile
Phone.

Features

408

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.
Mobile Phone: For certain connected phones, the
ring tone stored in the phone sounds from the
speakers.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to the system.

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a name from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

Work

Voice

setting
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

Pager

2 Phone Settings screen P. 399
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to the system.

2. Select Automatic Phone Sync.

Features

Pref

The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.

3. Select On or Off.

Continued

409

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 402

Features

2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select New Entry.
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the connected cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Select Yes or No.

5. Select Record, or use the
button and
follow the prompts to complete the voice
tag.

410

When a voice tag is stored, press the
button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag
name.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 399

2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Record.
5. Select Record, or use the
button and
follow the prompts to complete the voice
tag.

1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name.
For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

Features

■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 399

2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Clear.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

Continued

411

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To edit a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 399

2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select a setting you want.

■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 399
Features

412

2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Delete.
4. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phonebook Phonetic Modification

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that
it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
■ To add a new voice tag
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog. tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.

Continued

Features

6. Select the phone you want to add
phonetic modification to.

You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.

413

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

414 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

7. Select New Voice Tag.

Features

8. Select a contact name you want to add to.
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.

9. Select Modify.
10. Using Record or the
button, follow
the prompts to complete the voice tag.
11. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.

414

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To modify a voice tag

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog. tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.

You can only modify or delete contact names for the
currently connected phone.

Features

6. Select the phone you want to modify
phonetic modification.
7. Select a contact name you want to
modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.

8. Select Modify.
9. Using Record or the
button, follow
the prompts to complete the voice tag.
10. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.

Continued

415

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

416 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete a modified voice tag
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog. tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.

Features

6. Select the phone for which you want to
delete phonetic modification.
7. Select a contact name you want to delete.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

8. Select Delete.
u The selected contact name has been
selected.
9. Select OK.

416

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To delete all modified voice tags
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog. tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.

■ Making a Call

Features

6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification.
u The contact name list appears.
7. Select Delete All.
8. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen, then select Yes.

1Making a Call

You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from most screens.
Press the
button and say the voice tag name.
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
While there is an active connection with Apple
CarPlayTM, phone calls can be made only from Apple
CarPlayTM.

Continued

417

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Select
.
2. Select Phonebook.

Features

3. Select a name.
u You can also search by letter. Select
Search.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering name, if multiple numbers exist
select a number.
u You can also swipe up or down to scroll
through the list of contacts alphabetically
on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 233

4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

418

1To make a call using the imported phonebook
You can also select Phonebook on the Phone
Menu screen.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 402

2. Select Dial.
3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers.
4. Select
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 402
Features

2. Select Redial.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using the Call History
Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone Menu screen.

1To make a call using the Call History
The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed,
received, or missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the
system.)

2 Phone Menu screen P. 402

2. Select Call History.
3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued

419

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
1. Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 402

2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 410

button to

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.

1Receiving a Call

■ Receiving a Call
Features

When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming call screen appears.
Press the
Press the
call.

button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the

Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the
and
buttons.

420

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower
Mute Icon
half of the screen.

Continued

You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen.

Features

Select the option.
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

421

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

Features

HFL can display newly received text or e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message or e-mail.
2. Select Read to listen to the message.
u The text message or e-mail is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading
out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, select
Stop.

1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
The system can only receive massages that are sent as
text (SMS) messages. Messages sent using the data
services will not be displayed in the list.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text messages and e-mails.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message/e-mail feature. Only use the text message/email feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
When you receive a text message or e-mail for the
first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Message Notification
setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
P. 407

422

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Selecting a Mail Account

1Selecting a Mail Account

If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.

2 Phone Settings screen P. 399

2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Select
Account.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select Text Messages or an e-mail account
you want.
Features

Select
Account

You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.

Continued

423

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Displaying Messages
Message List

1Displaying Messages

■ Displaying text messages

The

1. Go to the Phone Menu screen.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.

2 Phone Menu screen P. 402

2. Select Text/Email.
u Select account if necessary.
3. Select a message.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
Text Message
Features

424

icon appears next to an unread message.

To see the previous or next message, select
(previous) or
(next) on the message screen.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Folder List

■ Displaying e-mails
1. Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 402

Message List

2. Select Text/Email.
u Select Select Account if necessary.
3. Select a folder.
4. Select a message.
u The e-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.

Features

E-mail

Continued

425

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Read or Stop reading a message
1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 424

2. Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Read again to start reading the
message from the beginning.

■ Reply to a message

Features

426

1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 424

2. Select Reply.
3. Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
Only certain phones receive and send messages when
paired and connected. For a list of compatible
phones:
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

427 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Dial.

Features

Continued

427

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ In Case of Emergency

1In Case of Emergency

■ Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the HondaLink operator. If
connected, information about your vehicle, its
location, and its condition can be sent to the
operator*1; you also can speak to the operator
when connected.
Features

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation
constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed
to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/
TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency
services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT
SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for
any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in,
or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental
regulation.

*1 : Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle's location may not be sent to
the operator.

428

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
operator if the battery level is low, the line is
disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
coverage.
You cannot use this emergency service when:
• You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage
areas.
• There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions
using the screen while talking to the operator.
Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your
vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To enable notification

1To enable notification

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 399

2. Select the Phone tab, then HondaLink
Assist.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

Setting options:
• On: Notification is available.
• Off: Disable the feature.

Features

429

Compass *
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w , the compass self-calibrates, and the
compass display appears.

Compass Calibration

Features

If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need
to manually calibrate the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
2. Press and hold the
(day/night) button
until the display shows the compass setting
menu.
3. Rotate
to select Calibration, then press
.
Compass Setting Menu Items

4. When the display changes to Push CAL
Start, press .
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.
u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator
goes off.

430

* Not available on all models

1Compass *
Compass operation can be affected under the
following conditions:
• Driving near power lines or stations
• Crossing a bridge
• Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
• When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass:
• The
(Back) button returns to the previous
screen.

uuCompass * uCompass Zone Selection

Compass Zone Selection

Zone Number

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
2. Press and hold the
(day/night) button
until the display shows the compass setting
menu.
3. Rotate
to select Zone, then press .
The display shows the current zone
number.
4. Rotate
to select the zone number of
your area (See Zone Map), then press .

1Compass Zone Selection
The zone selection is done to compensate the
variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in
use, the display returns to normal after the calibration
is completed.

Zone Map
Features

Guam Island: Zone 8
Puerto Rico: Zone 11

431

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

432

432 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.

Before Driving................................... 434
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation.......................... 439
Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 442
Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 443
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information......................... 444
Important Safety Precautions............ 444
Avoiding Trouble ............................. 445
When Driving
Models without smart entry system

Starting the Engine .......................... 446
Models with smart entry system

Starting the Engine .......................... 448
Precautions While Driving................. 453

* Not available on all models

Continuously Variable Transmission... 454
Shifting............................................ 455
ECON Button ................................... 457
Cruise Control * ............................... 458
Front Sensor Camera * ..................... 465
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF) * ....................... 467

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)
System * ..................................... 482

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * .. 486
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System............. 494
LaneWatchTM * .................................. 500
Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control
SystemTM * ...................................... 502

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...503

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation ......... 506
Braking
Brake System ................................... 508
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 514
Brake Assist System ......................... 515
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) * ..................................... 516
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 526
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 531
Refueling........................................... 533
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions.... 536
Turbo Engine Vehicle *...................... 537

433

Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.

■ Exterior Checks
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
Driving

434

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 581

• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.

1Exterior Checks
NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

■ Interior Checks

1Interior Checks

• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 437

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 144

• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.

Driving

• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have
the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.

2 Adjusting the Seats P. 197
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraints P. 201

• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 194
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 195

Continued

435

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 44

• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 80

Driving

436

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire
and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.

1Maximum Load Limit

3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.

Label Example

Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Continued

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 636

Driving

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load.
2 Specifications P. 636

437

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

438 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Driving

Example1

Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)

Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)

Example2

438

Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation
■ Towing Load Limits

1Towing Load Limits

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
■ Total trailer weight
Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,
cargo, and everything in or on it must not
exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg). Towing loads in
excess of this can seriously affect vehicle
handling and performance and can damage
the engine and drivetrain.
Total Load

■ Tongue load

Continued

Exceeding any load limit or improperly
loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a
crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and
trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the
tongue load.
Break-in Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600
miles (1,000 km).

Driving

Tongue Load
Tongue
Load

The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded
trailer on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight.
• Excessive tongue load reduces front tire
traction and steering control. Too little
tongue load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
• To achieve a proper tongue load, start by
loading 60% of the load toward the front
of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.
Readjust the load as needed.

3 WARNING

Never exceed the gross weight ratings.
Gross weight information
2 Specifications P. 636

439

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

■ Towing Equipment and Accessories
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,
and where you are towing.

■ Hitches
The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.

■ Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

■ Trailer brakes

Driving

Recommended for any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more:
There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,
be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to
your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard.

■ Additional towing equipment
Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a
trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special
mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.

440

1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and
maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer maker for proper installation and
setup of the equipment.
Improper installation and setup can affect the
handling, stability, and braking performance of your
vehicle.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other
items are recommended or required for your towing
situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type
and brand. If a connector is required, it should only
be installed by a qualified technician.
Trailer packages and products:
• Ball mount, hitch plug, hitch pin etc.
• Wiring harness kit
• Trailer hitch kit
2 Trailer brakes P. 440
Are available at a dealer.

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

■ Trailer light

1Trailer light

Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and
local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
Grand (Black)
Left Turn Signal (Light Blue)

The trailer lighting connector is located behind the
left side panel in the cargo area.
Even if you are planning to use the non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, ask a dealer for the
correct connector and pins.

Right Turn Signal (Light Green)

+B Trailer (White)
Small (Violet)

Brake Light (Pink)

The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is
required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician.

Driving

We recommend that you have a dealer install a Honda wiring harness and converter.
They are designed for your vehicle.

441

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer

Driving Safely with a Trailer
■ Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
• Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
• Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 439

• Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
• Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving.
• Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
• Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.

■ Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving

• Drive slower than normal.
• Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
• Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.

■ Turning and Braking
• Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
• Allow more time and distance for braking.
• Do not brake or turn suddenly.

■ Driving in Hilly Terrain
• Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the white (H) mark, turn off the
climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool
down the engine if necessary.

442

1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Operating speed when towing a trailer is restricted
up to 65 mph (100 km/h).
Parking
In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel
chocks at each of the trailer's tires.

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 632

Driving

443

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher
ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-road activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat
different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it
does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get
acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.

Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations:
• Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 437
Driving

444

• Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
• Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.
• It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.

1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

3 WARNING
Improperly operating this vehicle on or the
off pavement can cause a crash or rollover
in which you and your passengers could be
seriously injured or killed.
• Follow all instructions and guidelines in
this owner’s manual.
• Keep your speed low, and don’t drive
faster than conditions permit.
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 36
2 Precautions While Driving P. 453

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

445 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble

Avoiding Trouble

Driving

• Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all
scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the
condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
• Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have
limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and
power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in
a hazardous situation.
• Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start
or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
• Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover
or damage to your suspension or other components.
• Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to
drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight or down a slope is usually the
safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before
you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it. Find
another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back
down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
• Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water
in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully
before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground
underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find
another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The
water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and
causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
• If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you
unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could
damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need
to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.

445

When Driving
Models without smart entry system

Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The electric parking brake indicator
comes on for 15 seconds when you pull
up the electric parking brake switch.

Brake Pedal

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N with the parking brake applied, it is
safer to start it in (P .

Driving

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.

446

1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 10
seconds.
• If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 30 seconds before trying again.
• If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 30 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

■ Starting to Drive
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the shift lever in (D . Select (R
when reversing.
2. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake indicator goes off.
2 Parking Brake P. 508

■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

1Starting the Engine
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is
used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 161
You can also release the parking brake by pressing
the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start
your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it
with the electric parking brake switch than by
releasing it with the accelerator pedal.
1Hill start assist system

Move the shift lever to (D , (S , or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.

Driving

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is
switched off.

447

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Models with smart entry system

Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The electric parking brake indicator
comes on for 15 seconds when you pull
up the electric parking brake switch.

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N with the parking brake applied, it is
safer to start it in (P .
Driving
Brake Pedal

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 161

448

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1Starting the Engine
Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry
remote is weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 611
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds
before trying again.

■ Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Driving

1. Shift to (P .
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Continued

449

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

■ Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback *
You can remotely start the engine using the

button on the smart entry remote.

3 WARNING
Engine exhaust contains toxic carbon
monoxide.

■ To start the engine
Press the
button, then press and hold
the
button.
Some exterior lights flash once.

Go within the range,
and try again.

LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.

Breathing carbon monoxide can kill you or
cause unconsciousness.
Never use the remote engine starter when
the vehicle is parked in a garage or other
area with limited ventilation.

Driving

The remote engine start may violate local laws.
Before using the remote engine start, check your
local laws.

Some exterior lights flash six
times if the engine runs
successfully.

Some exterior lights will not
flash if the engine runs
unsuccessfully.

When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling
and the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed
simultaneously.
To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the
button, then press and hold the
button.
u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was
transmitted successfully.

450

1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback *

* Not available on all models

If there are buildings and obstacles between your
vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced.
The range may be less when the vehicle is running.
This distance may vary by external electrical
interference.
The engine may not start by the remote engine start
if:
• You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the audio/information screen *.
• The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
• The gear is in a position other than (P .
• The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked.

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

■ To stop the engine

1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback *

• You have already used the remote twice to start

Go within the range,
and try again.

the engine.

• Another registered smart entry remote is in the

The exterior lights will not flash when the remote is out of
the smart entry system range.
The engine will not stop.

The exterior lights flash once if the engine stops successfully.

* Not available on all models

Continued

While the engine is running, the vehicle will
automatically precondition inside the vehicle.
When it is warm outside:
• The air conditioning is activated in recirculation
mode.
When it is cold outside:
• The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
• The rear defogger and door mirror heaters are
activated.
• The seat and heated steering wheel are activated *
2 Heated Steering Wheel*1 P. 220
2 Front Seat Heaters * P. 221

Driving

Press and hold the
button for one
second.

vehicle.

• There is an antenna failure.
• Door is unlocked with the built-in key.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
• The security system alarm is not set.

451

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

■ Starting to Drive
When the engine was started using the

1Starting to Drive
button * on the smart entry remote

1. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button
simultaneously.
When the engine was started in any case

2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.
3. With the parking brake is applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake indicator goes off.
4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.

■ Hill start assist system
Driving

Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Move the shift lever to (D , (S , or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.

When the engine was started using the
on the smart entry remote

button *

The engine stops when the shift lever is moved out of
(P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.
You can also release the parking brake by pressing
the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start
your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it
with the electric parking brake switch than by
releasing it with the accelerator pedal.
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is
switched off.

452

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Precautions While Driving
■ Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of control:
• Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.
• Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.
• Roof load capacity is 165 lbs (75 kg), available roof racks/carriers may have lower
capacities. Please check accessory's information (Honda accessory).

■ In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
NOTICE

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.

Driving

■ Other Precautions

1Precautions While Driving

453

uuWhen DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission
■ Creeping
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

■ Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

1Precautions While Driving
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q *1
while driving, the engine will shut down and all
steering and brake power assist functions will stop,
making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.

Driving

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition
switch.
1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 36
2 Precautions While Driving P. 453

454

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■ Shift lever positions

1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1
and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P .

Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse
Used when reversing

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition
switch.

Neutral
Used when idling

Driving

Drive
Used for normal driving

Release Button

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.

Drive (S)
Used:
● For better acceleration
● To increase engine braking
● When going up or down hills
Low
● Used to further increase engine braking
● Used when going up or down hills

Continued

455

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE

Tachometer's red zone

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Driving

Depress the brake pedal and press the
shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.

456

If the transmission indicator (D blinks when driving,
in any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.

uuWhen DrivinguECON Button

ECON Button
Models with information display

1ECON Button
While in ECON mode, the climate control system has
greater temperature fluctuations.

Models with driver information interface

Driving

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.
The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the
performance of the engine, transmission, climate control system, and cruise control.

457

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

Models with information display

Cruise Control *
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.

Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~

Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.

■ Shift positions for cruise control:

Driving

458

How to use

CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.

■ Press the CRUISE button on

Cruise control is ready to use.

* Not available on all models

Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.

In (D or (S

the steering wheel.

3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.

When to use

■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:

1Cruise Control *

When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more
time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

459 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
−/SET Button

On when cruise control begins

Press and release

The moment you release the −/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

Driving

Take your foot off the pedal and press the −/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.

During cruise control, Straight Driving Assist Function is activated. This control
function is an EPS function and it helps reduce the steering effort to keep the
steering angle on a straight road with cants.

Continued

459

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or −/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.

You can set the vehicle speed using the −/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.

To increase speed

To decrease speed
Driving

• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set.

■ To Cancel

CRUISE
Button

CANCEL
Button

To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the CRUISE button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.

460

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

Models with driver information interface

Desired speed in a range from
about 25 mph (40 km/h) to 125
mph (200 km/h)

Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.

Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.

■ Shift positions for cruise control:

It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.

In (D or (S

CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.

■ Press the CRUISE button on

Cruise control is ready to use.

When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more
time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.

the steering wheel.

Continued

Driving

How to use

* Not available on all models

3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.

When to use

■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:

1Cruise Control *

461

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

462 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
−/SET Button

On when cruise control begins

Press and release

Driving

Take your foot off the pedal and press the −/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the −/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The set speed is displayed. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator and set speed
comes on.
During cruise control, Straight Driving Assist Function is activated. This control
function is an EPS function and it helps reduce the steering effort to keep the
steering angle on a straight road with cants.

462

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or −/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.

You can set the vehicle speed using the −/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.

To increase speed

To decrease speed

Continued

Driving

• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep the button pressed, the speed limit increases or decreases in
increments of 5 mph or 5 km/h every 0.5 second until system limit is reached.
• The vehicle may accelerate or decelerate until the set speed is reached.

463

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

■ To Cancel

CRUISE
Button

1To Cancel

CANCEL
Button

To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the CRUISE button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.

Driving

464

uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera *

Front Sensor Camera *
The camera, used in systems; such as RDM, LKAS, ACC with LSF and CMBSTM, is
designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate their
functions.

■ Camera Location and Handling Tips
Front Sensor
Camera

This camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.

* Not available on all models

Continued

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield, the hood, or the front grill that could
obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the
system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.

Driving

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing
system to shut off, when parking, find a shady
area or face the front of the vehicle away from
the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do
not allow it to cover the camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on
it.

1Front Sensor Camera *

465

uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera *

1Front Sensor Camera *
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate:Camera Temperature Too High:
message appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the air flow directed toward the camera.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.

Driving

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate:Clean Front Windshield:
message
appears:
• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

466

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate
and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
When ACC with LSF slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle’s brake
lights will illuminate.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

3 WARNING
Improper use of ACC with LSF can lead
to a crash.
Use ACC with LSF only when driving on
expressways or freeways and in good
weather conditions.

When to use

The camera is
located behind
the rearview
mirror.

3 WARNING

Always be prepared to apply the brake
pedal if the conditions require.

The radar sensor is
inside the front grille.

■ Vehicle speed for ACC with LSF: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with

Driving

ACC with LSF has limited braking
capability and may not stop your vehicle
in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle
that quickly stops in front of you.

Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC with LSF.
Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always
keep a safe distance between your vehicle and other
vehicles.

LSF range – ACC with LSF operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
No vehicle is detected within ACC with LSF range – ACC with LSF operates at
the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or above.
■ Shift position for ACC with LSF: In (D or (S .

* Not available on all models

Continued

467

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ How to activate the system

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

How to use

ACC (green) is on in the instrument panel.
ACC with LSF is ready to use.

■ Press the MAIN button on
the steering wheel.

When the MAIN button is pressed, both ACC with
LSF and the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are
either turned on or off.
ACC with LSF may not work properly under certain
conditions.
2 ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
P. 473
When not using ACC with LSF: Turn off adaptive
cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will
turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).

Driving

Do not use ACC with LSF under the following
conditions:
• On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
• On roads with sharp turns.
• On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such
cases, ACC with LSF will not apply the brakes to
maintain the set speed.
• On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.

468

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed

1To Set the Vehicle Speed
−/SET button

You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface */
audio/information screen * between mph and km/h.
2 Customized Features P. 337

On when ACC with LSF
begins

Press and release

Set Vehicle Distance

Set Vehicle Speed

* Not available on all models

Driving

When driving at 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the pedal and
press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the
button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with LSF begins.
When driving slower than 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving and the
brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the button fixes the set speed to 25 mph (40 km/
h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If your vehicle is stationary and a vehicle is
detected ahead, your vehicle speed can be set, even with the brake pedal depressed.
When ACC with LSF starts operating, the
vehicle icon, distance bars and set speed
appear on the driver information interface.
During cruise control, Straight Driving Assist
Function is activated. This control function is
an EPS function and it helps reduce the
steering effort to keep the steering angle on a
straight road with cants.
Continued

469

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ When in Operation

1When in Operation

■ There is a vehicle ahead
ACC with LSF monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with LSF range. If a
vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with LSF system maintains or decelerates your
vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following interval from the
vehicle ahead.

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if
another vehicle cuts in front of you, the beeper
sounds, a message appears on the driver information
interface.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
distance from the vehicle ahead.

2 To Set or Change Following Interval P. 476
Beep

Driving

ACC with LSF Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed is detected in front of you, your
vehicle starts to slow down.

A vehicle icon appears on the
driver information interface

470

Even if the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead is short, ACC with LSF may start
accelerating your vehicle under the following
circumstances:
• The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
• A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the distance
between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in
front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with
LSF detecting range. Change the ACC Forward
Vehicle Detect Beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 337

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ There is no vehicle ahead

A vehicle icon with dotted-line
contour appears on the driver
information interface

1When in Operation

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without
having to keep your foot on the brake or
accelerator pedal.
If there previously was a vehicle detected
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC with LSF accelerates your
vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.

Limitations
You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
distance when using ACC with LSF. Additionally,
ACC with LSF may not work properly under certain
conditions.
2 ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
P. 473

■ When you depress the accelerator pedal

Continued

Driving

You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or
visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with LSF range.
ACC with LSF stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal,
the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following interval while a
vehicle ahead is within the ACC with LSF range.

471

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with LSF range and slows to a stop
Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The
Stopped message appears on the driver
information interface.
When the vehicle ahead of you starts again,
the vehicle icon on the driver information
interface blinks. If you press the RES/+ or –/
SET button, or depress the accelerator pedal,
ACC with LSF operates again within the prior
set speed.
If no vehicle is ahead of you before you
resume driving, depress the accelerator pedal
and ACC with LSF will operate again within
the prior set speed.
Driving

472

1A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with LSF range and slows
to a stop

3 WARNING
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped
while the ACC with LSF system is
operating can result in the vehicle
moving without operator control.
A vehicle that moves without operator
control can cause a crash, resulting in
serious injury or death.
Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is
stopped by ACC with LSF.

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations

1ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations

The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.

The radar sensor for ACC with LSF is shared with the
collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM).
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) * P. 516

2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 465
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 465

■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
replace the radar sensor cover.

■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).

■ Vehicle conditions

* Not available on all models

Continued

If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the
following situations, the radar sensor may not work
properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
• The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
• You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
• Your vehicle has a frontal collision.

Driving

• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong size, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• The parking brake is applied.
• When the front grille is dirty.
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains are installed.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).

473

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

474 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ Detection limitations

Driving

474

• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
• When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET button on the
steering wheel.
To increase speed

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
than your increased set speed, ACC with LSF may not
accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set
interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
When you depress the accelerator pedal and then
push and release the –/SET button, the current speed
of the vehicle is set.

To decrease speed

Continued

Driving

• Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep pressing the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

475

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

476 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ To Set or Change Following Interval
Press the (Interval) button to change the
ACC with LSF following interval.
Each time you press the button, the followinginterval (the interval behind a vehicle detected
ahead of you) setting cycles through extra
long, long, middle, and short following
intervals.
Interval Button

Driving

476

Determine the most appropriate followinginterval setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any
following-interval requirements set by local
regulation.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

477 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or
extra long following interval becomes. See the following examples for your
reference.
When the Set Speed is:
Following Interval
65 mph (104 km/h)

Short

83 feet
25 meters
1.1 sec

100 feet
31 meters
1.1 sec

Middle

110 feet
33 meters
1.5 sec

137 feet
42 meters
1.5 sec

Long

154 feet
47 meters
2.1 sec

200 feet
61 meters
2.1 sec

Extra
Long

204 feet
62 meters
2.8 sec

272 feet
83 meters
2.9 sec

Driving

50 mph (80 km/h)

When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has
stopped, the distance between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with LSF
distance setting.

Continued

477

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ To Cancel

1To Cancel

CANCEL
Button

MAIN
Button

Driving

478

To cancel ACC with LSF, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
u ACC with LSF indicator goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u When the LSF function has stopped the
vehicle, you cannot cancel ACC with LSF
by depressing the brake pedal.

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled ACC with LSF, you can resume the prior set
speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+
button.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
with LSF has been turned off using the MAIN button.
Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then
set the desired speed.

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ Automatic cancellation

1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC with LSF has been automatically
canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed.
Wait until the condition that caused ACC with LSF to
cancel improves, then press the –/SET button.

Driving

The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when
ACC with LSF is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC
with LSF to automatically cancel:
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty.
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA® or CMBSTM is activated.
• When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC with LSF range is too close to your
vehicle.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• When the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
• When passing through an enclosed space, such as tunnel.
The ACC with LSF automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following
causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
• The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
• The engine is turned off.

Continued

479

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ To Switch ACC with LSF to Cruise Control
ACC with
LSF ON

Cruise
Control ON

Press and hold the (interval) button for one
second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on
the driver information interface for two
seconds, and then the mode switches to
Cruise.
To switch back to ACC with LSF, press and
hold the button again for one second.

■ When to use
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.
Driving

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
During cruise control, Straight Driving Assist Function is activated. This control
function is an EPS function and it helps reduce the steering effort to keep the
steering angle on a straight road with cants.

480

* Not available on all models

1To Switch ACC with LSF to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
you to maintain a following interval from a vehicle
ahead of you.
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the audio/information screen *
between mph and km/h.
2 Customized Features P. 337

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
• Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep pressing the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

■ To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control canceled automatically.

Driving

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the MAIN button is turned off.

481

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle
unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings.

■ How the System Works
The front camera behind the rearview mirror
monitors left and right lane markings (in white
or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close
to detected lane markings without a turn
signal activated, the system, in addition to a
visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts
you with rapid vibrations on the steering
wheel, to help you remain within the detected
lane.
Driving

As a visual alert, the Lane Departure
message appears on the driver information
interface.
If the system determines that its steering input
is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the
roadway, it may apply braking.
u Braking is applied only when the lane
markings are solid continuous lines.
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid
crossing over detected lane markings.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system
beeps to alert you.

482

* Not available on all models

1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has
limitations.
Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a
collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the
vehicle within your driving lane.
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is
detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM
system may not detect all lane markings or lane
departures; accuracy will vary based on weather,
speed and lane marker condition. It is always your
responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid
collisions.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 465
The RDM system may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 484
There are times when you may not notice RDM
functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or
road surface conditions. If the Lane Departure
message displays repeatedly and you do not apply
responsive actions, the system beeps and cancels
RDM functions.

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *

■ How the System Activates

1How the System Activates

The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the
following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.
• The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.

■ RDM On and Off

RDM system function can be impacted when the
vehicle is:
• Not driven within a traffic lane.
• Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
• Driven in a narrow lane.

1RDM On and Off
When you have selected Warning Only from the
customized options using the audio/information
screen, the system does not operate the steering
wheel and braking.

Driving

Press the RDM button to turn the system on
and off.
u The indicator in the button comes on and
the message appears on the driver
information interface when the system is
on.

Indicator

The RDM system may automatically shut off and the
indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 80

RDM Button

Continued

483

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

484 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *

■ RDM Conditions and Limitations
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

■ Environmental conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Driving

484

Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
Reflections on the interior of the front windshield.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

485 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *

■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• When driving on roads with double lines.

• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains are installed.

Driving

■ Vehicle conditions

485

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides audible and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

■ Steering input assist
The system applies torque to the
steering to keep the vehicle between the
left and right lane lines. The applied
torque becomes stronger as the vehicle
gets closer to either of the lane lines.
■ LKAS camera
Monitors the lane
lines

■ Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering
wheel and a warning display alert
you that the vehicle is drifting out of
a detected lane.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a
substitute for your vehicle control. The system does
not work if you take your hands off the steering
wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages * P. 103
Do not place objects on the instrument panel.
Objects may reflect on the front windshield and
prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.

Driving

The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect
all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will
vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker
condition. It is always your responsibility to safely
operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.
The LKAS may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 The LKAS Conditions and Limitations
P. 492

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and
resumes after the signals are off.
If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts
activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

486

* Not available on all models

You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 465

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

■ Lane Keep Support Function

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane, when the vehicle
nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become
stronger.

The LKAS may not function as designed while driving
in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with
sharp curves.
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will
temporarily be canceled. When lane is detected,
system will recover automatically.

When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering
wheel vibration as well as a warning display.

Driving

■ Lane Departure Warning Function

Warning Area

* Not available on all models

Continued

487

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

■ When the System can be Used
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• The vehicle speed is between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.

■ How to activate the system
MAIN Button
Driving
LKAS Button

488

* Not available on all models

1. Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the driver information
interface.
The system is ready to use.

2. Press the LKAS button.
u Lane outlines appear on the driver
information interface.
The system is activated.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line
due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the
lane while driving.
u The dotted outer lines change to solid
ones once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.

■ To cancel

1When the System can be Used
The LKAS temporarily deactivates when it fails to
detect lane lines. When the system detects the lines
again, it comes back on automatically.

1To cancel
Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC with LSF
on and off.

To cancel the LKAS:
Press the MAIN or LKAS button.

MAIN Button

Driving

The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the
engine, even if you turned it on the last time
you drove the vehicle.
LKAS Button

Continued

489

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

490 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

■ The system operation is suspended if

When the LKAS is suspended,
the lane lines on the driver
information interface change
to contour lines.

you:
• Set the wipers to continuous operation.
u Turning the wipers off resumes the
LKAS.
• Decrease the vehicle speed to 40 mph (64
km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to 45 mph
(72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the
brake pedal.
Models with automatic intermittent wipers

Driving

490

• Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the
wipers operate continuously.
u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop
or operate intermittently.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

491 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

■ The LKAS may automatically be suspended when:
•
•
•
•

The system fails to detect lane lines.
The steering wheel is quickly turned.
You fail to steer the vehicle.
The vehicle runs on a curved road over the speed limit.

Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.

■ The LKAS may automatically be canceled when:
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• When driving through a sharp curve.
• When driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).
• When the ABS or VSA® systems engage.
Driving

A beeper will sound if the LKAS is automatically canceled.

Continued

491

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

492 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

■ The LKAS Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in
the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:

■ Environmental conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Driving

492

Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markings.
Reflections on the interior of the front windshield.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

493 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

Driving

■ Vehicle conditions

493

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
Helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than
what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does
so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

■ VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.

Driving

VSA® System
Indicator

1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire types and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
types of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
The VSA® indicator may come on after re-connecting
the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12
mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does
not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/
h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

494

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

■ VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF Indicator

This button is on the driver side control panel.
To partially disable VSA® functionality/
features, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
The traction control stops fully functioning,
allowing the wheels to spin more freely at low
speed. The VSA® OFF indicator will also come
on and a message on the driver information
interface * informs you that the mode is
changed.

VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.

* Not available on all models

With the
button pressed, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA®
traction and stability enhancement becomes less
effective.
When the
button is pressed, the traction control
function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the
button
pressed if you are not able to free it without.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
press the
button again. We do not recommend
driving your vehicle with the
button pressed
(indicator on).
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.

Driving

To restore VSA® functionality/features, press
the
(VSA® OFF) button until you hear a
beep.

1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System

The VSA® OFF indicator may come on after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at
more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should
go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.

495

uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist

Agile Handling Assist
Lightly brakes each of the front and rear wheels, as needed, when you turn the
steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during
cornering.

1Agile Handling Assist
The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in
all driving situations. You still need to drive and
corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and
always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, the agile handling assist does not
activate.
You may hear a sound coming from the engine
compartment while the agile handling assist is
activated. This is normal.

Driving

496

uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information (BSI) System *

Blind spot information (BSI) System *
Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle,
particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as “blind spots.”
When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the
appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you
change lanes.

■ How the system works

3 WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on the blind spot
information system when changing lanes.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.

●

Alert Zone
A

Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, BSI has limitations. Over
reliance on BSI may result in a collision.

B
The system is for your convenience only. Even if an
object is within the alert zone, the following
situations may occur.
• The BSI alert indicator may not come on due to
obstruction (splashes, etc.) even without the Blind
Spot Info Not Available MID appearing.
• The BSI alert indicator may come on even with the
message appearing.

Driving

The transmission is in (D .
● Your vehicle speed is
between 20 mph (32 km/h)
Radar Sensors:
and 100 mph (160 km/h)
underneath the
Alert zone range
rear bumper
corners
A: Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)
B: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
C: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)

1Blind spot information (BSI) System *

The BSI alert indicator may not come on under the
following conditions:
• A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more
than two seconds.
• A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and the
vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10
km/h).
• An object not detected by the radar sensors
approaches or passes your vehicle.

* Not available on all models

Continued

497

uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information (BSI) System *

■ When the system detects a vehicle
BSI Alert Indicator: Located on the outside
rearview mirror on both sides.

1Blind spot information (BSI) System *
Comes On

■ Comes on when
●

●

A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind
to overtake you with a speed difference of
no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your
vehicle.
You pass a vehicle with a speed difference
of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

■ Blinks and the beeper sounds when
You move the turn signal lever in the direction
of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds
three times.

Blinks

You can change the setting for BSI.
2 Customized Features P. 337
Turn the system off when towing a trailer.
The system may not work properly for the following
reasons:
• The added mass tilts the vehicle and changes the
radar coverage.
• The trailer itself can be detected by the radar
sensors, causing the BSI alert indicators to come on.
BSI may be adversely affected when:

• Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc,.) are
detected.

• An object that does not reflect radio waves well,
Driving

such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone.

• Driving on a curved road.
• A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent
lane.

• The system picks up external electrical interference.
• The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly
repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.

• The orientation of the sensors has been changed.
• In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog).
• Making a turn at an intersection.
• Driving on a bumpy road.
• Making a short turn that slightly tilts the vehicle.

498

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information (BSI) System *

1Blind spot information (BSI) System *
For proper BSI use:
• Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.
• Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with
labels or stickers of any kind.
• Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear
bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be repaired,
or the rear bumper corner area is strongly impacted.
The system does not operate when in (R .

Driving

* Not available on all models

499

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

LaneWatchTM *
LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear
areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to
the passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these
areas and allows you to check for vehicle, in addition to your visual check and use of
the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience
while driving.
The system activates when you:
Move the turn signal
lever to the passenger
side.

Press the LaneWatch
button.

Driving

Press the LaneWatch
button again.

Audio/Information Screen

* Not available on all models

3 WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.

The system deactivates when you:
Pull the turn signal
lever back.

500

The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information screen.

1LaneWatchTM *

The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.

Camera

The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display
of traffic to the side and rear under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle.
• Your tires are over or under inflated.
• Your tires or wheels are of varied size or construction.

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.
• Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
• Display Time after Turn Signal Off: Changes the remaining Lane Watch
display time after you pull the turn signal lever back.
• Reference Line: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor.
• Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 337

■ Reference Lines

2
1

The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen look slightly
different from what they are.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
lever is in (R .
For proper LaneWatch operation:
• The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera
lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,
moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
• Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
1Reference Lines
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to
your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm
the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.

Driving

Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 farther away.

1LaneWatchTM *

The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions
and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines
on the screen may seem to appear closer than the
actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if:
• The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
• The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

* Not available on all models

501

uuWhen DrivinguReal Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM *

Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM *
When the system senses a loss of front wheel traction, it automatically transfers
some power to the rear wheels. This allows you to utilize all available traction and
may increase mobility.
You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking
that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.
If you excessively spin all four wheels and overheat the AWD system, only the front
wheels receive power. Stop until the system cools down.

Driving

502

* Not available on all models

1Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM *
NOTICE

Do not continuously spin the front tires of your
vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can
cause transmission or rear differential damage.
The AWD system may not function properly if tire
type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same
size and type of tire, and the air pressures as
specified.
2 Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 587

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to
come on and a message to appear on the driver information interface *.

■ TPMS Calibration

The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a
result of over inflation.

You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.

Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.
• The shift lever is in (P .
• The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

Driving

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 581

2 Checking Tires P. 581

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
• You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
• You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
• Snow chains are used.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Continued

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
• A compact spare tire is used.
• There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,
such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at
calibration.
• Snow chains are used.

503

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
TPMS
Button

Models with information display

Press and hold the TPMS button until the low
tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice,
indicating the calibration process has begun.
• If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does
not blink, confirm the above conditions
then press and hold the TPMS button again.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.
Models with color audio system
Models with driver information interface

Driving

You can calibrate the system from the customized
features on the driver information interface.
1. Press the
then 3 / 4 button to select
(Vehicle Settings), then press the
ENTER button.
u TPMS Calibration appears on the display.
2. Press the ENTER button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select Cancel or Calibrate.
3. Press the 3 / 4 button and select
Calibrate, then press the ENTER button.
u Calibration Started screen appears,
then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.
• If the Calibration Failed to Start message
appears, repeat steps 2-3.
• The calibration process finishes automatically.

504

1TPMS Calibration

• TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is
installed.

• The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between
30-65 mph (48-105 km/h).
• During calibration, if the ignition is turned off then
on again, and the vehicle is not moved within 45
seconds, the low tire pressure indicator may come
on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the
calibration process is not yet complete.
If the snow chains are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
after re-connecting the battery. Drive a short distance
at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should
go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

505 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Models with Display Audio

You can calibrate the system from the
customized feature on the audio/information
screen.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Select
.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Vehicle.
5. Select TPMS Calibration.
6. Select Cancel or Calibrate.
u When the calibration is complete, the
display returns to the customization
menu screen.

Driving

• If the Unable to initialize TPMS. message
appears, repeat steps 4-5.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

505

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

506 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

U.S. models

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
Driving

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.

506

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

507 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Driving

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.

507

Braking
Brake System
■ Parking Brake

1Parking Brake

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the
parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.
■ To apply
The electric parking brake can be applied any
time the vehicle has battery, no matter which
position the ignition switch*1 is in.

Electric Parking
Brake Switch

Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently
and securely.
u The parking brake indicator comes on.

■ To release
Driving

The vehicle must be ON (w *1 in order to
release the electric parking brake.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the electric parking brake switch.
u The parking brake indicator goes off.
Electric Parking
Brake Switch

Manually releasing the parking brake using
the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and
smoothly when facing down hill on steep hills.

You may hear the electric parking brake system
operating from the rear wheel area when you apply
or release the parking brake. This is normal.
The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric
parking brake system operation when you apply or
release the parking brake. This is normal.
You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the
battery goes dead.
2 Jump Starting P. 613
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch
while driving, the brakes on all four wheels are applied
by the VSA system until the vehicle come to a stop. The
electric parking brake then applies, and the switch
should be released.
In the following situations, the parking brake
automatically operates.
• When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake
hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while your
vehicle is stopped and the brake hold system is applied.
• When the engine is turned off while the brake hold
system is applied.
• When there is a problem with the brake hold
system while brake hold is applied.
Models with ACC with LSF

• When the vehicle is stops more than 10 minutes
while ACC with LSF is activated.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while your
vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with LSF.

• When the engine is turned off while ACC with LSF
is activated.

508

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Automatic parking brake feature operation

1Parking Brake

If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated:
• The parking brake is applied automatically when you turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0 *1.
• To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake indicator
is on.
2 Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature P. 510

■ To release automatically
Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the
vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
u The parking brake indicator goes off.

If the parking brake cannot be released
automatically, release it manually.
When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator
pedal may need to be pressed farther to
automatically release the electric parking brake.
The parking brake cannot be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
• Malfunction indicator lamp
• Transmission indicator

Driving

The parking brake may not be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
• Brake system indicator
• VSA® system indicator
• ABS indicator
• Supplemental restraint system indicator

Accelerator Pedal

The parking brake automatically releases as you depress the accelerator pedal when:
• You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
• The engine is running.
• The transmission is not in (P or (N .
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

509

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

510 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature

Driving

With the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, carry out the following steps to either activate
or deactivate the automatic parking brake feature.
1. Shift the select lever to (P .
2. Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up and release the parking brake switch.
u Check that the parking brake indicator has come on.
3. Pull up and hold the parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping sound,
release the switch and within 3 seconds pull up and hold the switch again.
4. When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the
switch.
u Two beeps indicates that the feature has been activated.
u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated.
u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will
remain applied after you turn off the engine.
u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake
indicator is on.
If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature for when putting your vehicle
through a conveyor type car wash or when having your vehicle towed. You can
follow the procedure explained below.
1. Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and then within 2 seconds push down the
parking brake switch.
u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected.
u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both
ACC with LSF and the automatic brake hold system.
u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake
indicator is on.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

510

1Parking brake system
In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in
place if applied.
When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and
make sure the automatic parking brake feature is
deactivated.
Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyortype car wash or when having your vehicle towed,
deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and
leave the parking brake released.

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Foot Brake

1Foot Brake

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. The brake assist system
increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an
emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.

Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear
indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates
that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an
occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply
the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by
high frequency vibration of the brake pads against
the rotating brake disc.

2 Brake Assist System P. 515
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 514

Driving

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear/speed position. With manual transmission
use a lower gear for greater engine braking.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
Whenever the brakes are activated by CMBSTM* or
another system that automatically controls braking,
the brake pedal is depressed and released in
accordance with braking function.

* Not available on all models

Continued

511

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Automatic Brake Hold

1Automatic Brake Hold

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is
pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at
traffic lights and in heavy traffic.

■ Turning on the system

■ Activating the system

Goes
Off

U.S.
Automatic Brake
Hold Button

Driving

512

Fasten your seat belt
properly, then start the
engine. Press the
automatic brake hold
button.
● The automatic brake
hold system indicator
comes on. The system
is turned on.

Brake Pedal

■ Canceling the system

On
Canada

Depress the brake pedal
to come to a complete
stop. The shift lever must
not be in (P or (R .
● The automatic brake
hold indicator comes
on. Braking is kept for
up to 10 minutes.
● Release the brake pedal
after the automatic
brake hold indicator
comes on.

Accelerator Pedal

Depress the accelerator
pedal while the shift
lever is in a position
other than (P or (N . The
brake hold is disengaged
and the vehicle starts to
move.
● The automatic brake
hold indicator goes
off. The system
releases the brake
automatically.

3 WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system
on steep hills or slippery roads may still
allow the vehicle to move if you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may
cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never activate the automatic brake hold
system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from
moving when stopped on a steep hill or
slippery roads.

3 WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to
park the vehicle may result in the vehicle
unexpectedly moving.
If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may
cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never leave the vehicle when braking is
temporarily kept by automatic brake hold
and always park the vehicle by putting the
transmission in (P and applying the parking
brake.

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ The system automatically cancels when:
• You engage the parking brake.
• You depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to (P or (R .
Under the following conditions, the system automatically cancels, and the parking
brake is applied:
• Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
• The engine is turned off.
• There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.

■ Turning off the automatic brake hold system

Automatic Brake
Hold Button

If you want to turn off automatic brake hold
while the system is in operation, press the
automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.

While the system is activated, you can turn off the
engine or park the vehicle through the same
procedure as you normally do.
2 When Stopped P. 526
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated,
the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is
off.

1Turning off the automatic brake hold system
Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold
system before using an automated car wash.
You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves
while the automatic brake hold system is in
operation.

Driving

Goes
Off

While the system is on, press the automatic
brake hold button again.
u The automatic brake hold system
indicator goes off.

1Automatic Brake Hold

513

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.“

■ ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
Driving

ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:
• Wet or snow covered roads.
• Roads paved with stone.
• Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

514

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
• When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
• When tire chains are installed.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:

• Motor sounds coming from the engine
compartment when the brakes are applied, or
when system checks are being performed after the
engine has been started and while vehicle is
accelerates.
• Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates.
These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS
systems and are no cause for concern.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

515 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

Driving

515

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a
potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help
minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
Important Safety Reminder
The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an
unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collision nor
stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your
responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering
wheel appropriately according to the driving
conditions.
The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a
vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain
conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 522
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 465

Driving

516

Be careful not to have radar sensor cover strongly
impacted.

* Not available on all models

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ How the system works

1How the system works
When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically
apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle
stops or a potential collision is not determined.

When to use

The camera is
located behind the
rearview mirror.

The radar sensor is
in the front grille.
Driving

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about
3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.
The CMBSTM activates when:
● The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected in
front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.
● Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system
determines there is a chance of a collision with:
- Vehicles detected in front of you that are stationary, oncoming, or traveling in
your same direction.
- A pedestrian who is detected in front of you.
● Your vehicle speed is above 62 mph (100 km/h), and the system determines
there is a chance of a collision with a vehicle detected in front of you traveling
in your same direction.
Continued

517

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ When the system activates

1How the system works

The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops
if the collision is avoided.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.)
Visual Alerts
Beep

Audible Alert

Driving

At system’s earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/
Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through multiinformation display setting options.
2 Customized Features P. 337

518

The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect
pedestrians.
However, this pedestrian detection feature may not
activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of
your vehicle under certain conditions.
Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection
limitations from the list.
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 522

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

519 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ Collision Alert Stages
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of
the stages before initiating the last stage.
CMBSTM
Distance between vehicles

Stage
one

NORMAL
LONG SHORT

Vehicle
Ahead

Your Vehicle

Your
Vehicle

Vehicle
Ahead

Braking

When in Long, visual and
audible alerts come on at a
There is a risk of a collision with longer distance from a vehicle
the vehicle ahead of you.
ahead than in Normal setting,
and in Short, at a shorter
distance than in Normal.

—

The risk of a collision has
increased, time to respond is
reduced.

Driving

Stage
two

The sensors detect a vehicle Audible & Visual WARNINGS

Lightly applied
Visual and audible alerts.

Stage
three

Your
Vehicle

Vehicle
Ahead

The CMBSTM determines that a
collision is unavoidable.

Forcefully applied

Continued

519

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ CMBSTM On and Off

Driving

520

* Not available on all models

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

Press this button until the beeper sounds to
switch the system on or off.

The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the
CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain
conditions.
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 522

When the CMBSTM is off:
• The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument
panel comes on.
• A message on the driver information
interface reminds you that the system is off.

When the CMBSTM is activated, it will continue to
operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially
depressed. However, it will be canceled if the
accelerator pedal is deeply depressed.

The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start
the engine, even if you turned it off the last
time you drove the vehicle.

The CMBSTM indicator may come on after
reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/
h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ With Little Chance of a Collision

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or
when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:

■ When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.

■ At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.

■ On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.

You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.

■ Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train
tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when
parking, stationary vehicles and walls.

* Not available on all models

Continued

Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for
cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a
mild detergent.
Do not paint, or apply any coverings or paint to radar
sensor area. This can impact CMBSTM operation.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g. the warning
message appears too frequently).
If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the
following situations, the radar sensor may not work
properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
• The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
• You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
• Your vehicle has a frontal collision.

Driving

■ Through a low bridge at high speed

For the CMBSTM to work properly:

521

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 465

■ Environmental conditions

Driving

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between objects and the background.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
Reflections on the interior of the front windshield.

■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast on a snowy or wet roadway).
• Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.

522

* Not available on all models

1CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by pressing the
CMBSTM off button and take your vehicle to a dealer.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

523 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ Vehicle conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
When tire chains are installed.
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
The camera temperature gets too high.
Driving with the parking brake applied.
When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty.

Driving

Continued

523

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

524 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ Detection limitations

Driving

524

• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

525 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only

• When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by
side.
• Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s
shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
• When the pedestrian is slouching or squatting.
• When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 7
feet (2 meter) in height.
• When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
• When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands or raised or they
are running.
• When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).

CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the CMBSTM indicator comes and stays
on when:
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
Once the conditions that caused CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g.,
cleaning), the system comes back on.

Driving

■ Automatic shutoff

525

Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully.
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P .
4. Turn off the engine.
u The parking brake indicator goes off in about 15 seconds.
Always confirm the electric parking brake is set, in particular if you are parked on an
incline.

Driving

526

1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE

The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake
may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are
expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if
parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so
they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the
slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from
moving. If you do not take either precaution, the
vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor *

Cross Traffic Monitor *
Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts
you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.
The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.

1Cross Traffic Monitor *

3 CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all
approaching vehicles and may not detect
an approaching vehicle at all.
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
back up the vehicle before doing so may
result in a collision.
Do not solely rely on the system when
reversing; always also use your mirrors, and
look behind and to the sides of your vehicle
before reversing.
Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

527

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor *

■ How the System Works

1Cross Traffic Monitor *

The system activates when:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The Cross Traffic Monitor system is turned
on.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 530

• The transmission is in (R .
• Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or
lower.
Radar sensors:
Underneath the rear bumper
corners
Driving

When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor
alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.
The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your
vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly
behind your vehicle.
The system does not detect or provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from
your vehicle, and it may not detect or alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary
objects.

528

* Not available on all models

Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect an approaching
vehicle, or may delay alerting you under the following
conditions:
• An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,
near your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the
radar sensor’s scope.
• Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph
(5 km/h) or higher.
• A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than
between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25
km/h).
• The system picks up external interference such as
other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong
radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
• Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with
snow, ice, mud or dirt.
• When there is bad weather.
• Your vehicle is on an incline.
• Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
• Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a
vehicle, and so on.
• The rear bumper or the sensors have been
improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been
deformed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper
corner area clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels
or stickers of any kind.

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor *

■ When the System Detects a Vehicle

1When the System Detects a Vehicle
If the
on the lower right changes to
when the
transmission is in (R , mud snow or ice may have
accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. Check the
bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly
clean the area if necessary.

Arrow Icon

Normal View

Wide View

Top Down View

An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information
screen.

If the display remains the same with the transmission
in (R , there may be a problem with the rear camera
system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.
Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.

Driving

Continued

If the
comes on when the transmission is in (R ,
there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic
Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.

529

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

530 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor *

■ Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
You can switch on and off the system using the audio/information screen.
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Camera.
4. Select Cross Traffic Monitor.
5. Select On or Off, then select OK.
The system can also be turned on and off on
the audio/information screen by pressing the
CTM icon.

Driving

530

Icon

Multi-View Rear Camera
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.
The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .

■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

Normal View Mode
Bumper

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline * settings.
2 Customized Features P. 337

Driving

Top Down View Mode

Approx. 79 inches (2 m)

Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R .
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guidelines *
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.

Approx. 118 inches (3 m)

* Not available on all models

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.

Wide View Mode
Guidelines

Camera
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Tailgate Open Range
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

Continued

531

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

532 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera

You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display.
Models with color audio system

Press the selector knob to switch the angle.
Models with Display Audio

Touch the appropriate icon to switch the angle.
: Wide view
: Normal view
: Top down view
All models

Driving

• If the last used viewing mode was Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the
next time you shift into (R .
• If Top View was last used before you turned off the engine, Wide mode is
selected next time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1 and shift to (R .
• If Top View was last used more than 10 seconds after you shift from (R , Wide
mode is selected the next time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

532

Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.

■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.

Driving

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.

1Fuel Information

■ Fuel tank capacity: 14 US gal (53 liters)

533

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

How to Refuel
Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle
directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler
nozzle.
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Pull on the fuel fill door release handle
Pull
under the lower left corner of the
dashboard.
u The fuel fill door opens.

Driving

534

1How to Refuel

3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only
service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of
smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon
fuel for other uses) or other non-service station
devices can damage the area in and around the filler
opening.

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

4. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the
lower part of filler opening, then insert it
slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the filler
nozzle goes down along with the filler
pipe.
u Keep the filler nozzle level.
u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will
click off automatically.
u After filling, wait about five seconds
before removing the filler nozzle.
5. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1How to Refuel
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.

Driving

If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
P. 634

535

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2
Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several
factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and
vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the
rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy

Driving

536

You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information display */driver information interface *.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.

* Not available on all models

1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Miles driven

Gallons of
fuel

Miles per
Gallon

100

Liter

Kilometers

L per 100 km

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/

Turbo Engine Vehicle *
Handling Precautions
The turbocharger is a high-precision device to obtain greater horsepower by
delivering a large volume of compressed air into the engine using a turbine driven by
the engine's exhaust gas pressure.
• When the engine is cold just after starting, avoid revving the engine or sudden
acceleration.
• Always replace the engine oil and engine oil filter according to the Maintenance
Minder. The turbine rotates at very high speeds over 100,000 rpm and its
temperature reaches over 1,292°F (700°C). It is lubricated and cooled by engine
oil. If you fail to replace the engine oil and filter at the scheduled distance or
interval, deteriorated engine oil may cause failure such as sticking and abnormal
noise of the turbine bearing.

1Turbo Engine Vehicle *
The scheduled maintenance intervals for replacing
the filter is indicated on the information display */
driver information interface *. Follow the information
of when to replace them.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 543
The temperature gauge pointer is at the H mark
when you restart the engine after driving under high
load conditions such as at high speed or in hilly
terrain. This is normal. The gauge goes down after
you idle or drive the vehicle for about one minute.

Driving

* Not available on all models

537

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

538

538 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 540
Safety When Performing Maintenance...541
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 542
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 543
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood.. 553
Opening the Hood ........................... 555
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 556
Oil Check ......................................... 557
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 559
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ...560

Engine Coolant ................................ 563
Transmission Fluid............................ 567
Brake Fluid....................................... 568
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 569
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 570

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades... 577
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 581
Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 582

Tire Labeling .................................... 582
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).. 584
Wear Indicators................................ 586
Tire Service Life ................................ 586

Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 587
Tire Rotation.................................... 588
Winter Tires ..................................... 589
Battery............................................... 590
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 592
Climate Control System Maintenance .. 594

Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 595
Exterior Care.................................... 597
Accessories and Modifications.......... 600

539

Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.)

■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.

■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 568

• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 581

• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
Maintenance

540

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 570

• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 577

* Not available on all models

1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the information display */driver
information interface *.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 545, 550
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 646
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given
task.

■ Maintenance Safety
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.

• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.

3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner's manual.

3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner's manual.

Maintenance

■ Vehicle Safety

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

541

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

542 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

Maintenance

542

Maintenance MinderTM
Select the Maintenance Minder to see maintenance items that are due soon and to
see the percentage of life remaining in the engine oil.
When the engine oil life is less than 15%, a Maintenance Minder message will
appear every time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, reminding you to bring
your vehicle to a dealer for service.
1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Models with information display

Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.

To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
2. Press the
(TRIP) knob repeatedly until
the engine oil life appears on the
information display.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0

Maintenance

The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays
on in the instrument panel after the engine oil
life becomes 0%. Have the indicated
maintenance done by a dealer immediately.

Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 545

543

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

544 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
To switch the display, press the
Oil Life Display

Maintenance

544

(TRIP) knob.
Explanation

Information

Maintenance Minder
Indicator

When you select the
Maintenance Minder screen, it
displays codes for maintenance
items due at the next engine oil
change, along with the
percentage of engine oil life
remaining.

—

Comes on for a few seconds
when you set the ignition switch
to ON, then goes off.

The engine oil life indicator starts The engine oil is approaching the
to appear along with other due- end of its service life.
soon maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life drops
Starts to come on when the
to 15 percent.
remaining engine oil life drops to
15 percent.
It goes off when the display is
switched.
The remaining engine oil has
passed its service life, and a
negative distance appears after
driving over 10 miles (U.S.
models) or 10 km (Canadian
models). The negative distance
on the display blinks.

The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced
immediately.

Stays on as a reminder even
when the display is switched.

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Service Items

1Maintenance Service Items

• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).

Maintenance
Minder Indicator

• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if

Maintenance Minder Message

Main Item

they are noisy.

Sub Items

U.S. models

CODE
A
B

●
●
●
●

CODE
1
2

●
●
●
●

3
4

●
●
●

5
6
7

●
●
●

Maintenance

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Inspect these items:
• Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
• Suspension components
• Driveshaft boots
• Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
• All fluid levels and condition of fluids
• Exhaust system#
• Fuel lines and connections#

*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission
temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
fluid changed every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder Indicator does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

Continued

545

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Canadian models

1Maintenance Service Items

• Inspect idle speed every 256,000 km (160,000
miles).

• Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3
if they are noisy.

CODE
A
0

Maintenance

546

●
●

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter

*1: If a Maintenance Minder indicator does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission
temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
fluid changed every 40,000 km (25,000 miles).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder Indicator does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE
1
2

●
●
●
●

3
4

●
●
●

5
6
7
9

●
●
●
●
●

Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid*4
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace rear differential fluid
Replace brake fluid*5
Inspect front and rear brakes
Inspect these items:
• Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
• Suspension components
• Driveshaft boots
• Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
• All fluid levels and condition of fluids
• Exhaust system#
• Fuel lines and connections#

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Resetting the Display
Reset the Maintenance Minder display if you have performed the maintenance
service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w and have
the vehicle at a complete stop.
2. Display the Maintenance Minder by
repeatedly pressing the
(TRIP) knob.
3. Press and hold the
knob for 10 seconds
or more.
u The display will blink to show it is in reset
mode.
4. Rotate the
knob to select the item you
wish to reset.
u Reset the selected item by pushing the
knob for five seconds or more.

1Resetting the Display
NOTICE

Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display
after a maintenance service results in the system
showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can
lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM
display after completing the required maintenance
service. If someone other than a dealer performs
maintenance service, reset the Maintenance
MinderTM display yourself.

Maintenance

547

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Models with driver information interface

To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

Certain maintenance items due soon, along with the estimated remaining oil life,
appear on the driver information interface.
You can view them on the Maintenance Minder screen at any time.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the
button several times until
is displayed.
3. Press ENTER to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The engine oil life appears
on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due soon.

Engine Oil Life
Maintenance

548

Button
ENTER Button

Main Item

Sub Item

Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0

Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 550

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

549 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information
Interface

Maintenance Message

—

Oil Life Display

Explanation
When you select the Maintenance
Minder screen, it displays codes for
maintenance items due at the next
engine oil change, along with the
percentage of engine oil life
remaining.

Information

—

The engine oil life indicator starts to The engine oil is approaching the end
of its service life.
appear along with other due-soon
maintenance item codes when the
remaining oil life drops to 15 percent.

Maintenance Due Now

The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the
percent. Press the
button to
end of its service life, and the
switch to another display.
maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
possible.

Maintenance Past Due

The system message indicator (

The engine oil has passed its service The engine oil life has passed.
life, and a negative distance appears The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced immediately.
after driving over 10 miles (U.S.
models) or 10 km (Canadian models).
The negative distance on the display
blinks.

Maintenance

Maintenance Due Soon

) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
Continued

549

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Service Items
System Message
Indicator

1Maintenance Service Items

• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).

• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if

Maintenance Minder Message

Main Item

they are noisy.

Sub Items

U.S. models

CODE
A
B

●
●
●
●

Maintenance

550

CODE
1
2

●
●
●
●

3
4

●
●
●

5
6
7

●
●
●

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Canadian models

1Maintenance Service Items

• Inspect idle speed every 256,000 km (160,000
miles).

• Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3
if they are noisy.

CODE
A
0

●
●

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter

●
●
●
●

3
4

●
●
●

5
6
7
9

●
●
●
●
●

Continued

Maintenance

*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission
temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
fluid changed every 40,000 km (25,000 miles).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder Indicator does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE
1
2

551

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Resetting the Display
Reset the Maintenance Minder display if you have performed the maintenance
service.

ENTER Button

1Resetting the Display
NOTICE

(Display/Information) Button
Maintenance

552

1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the
(display/information) button repeatedly until the
appears.
3. Press the ENTER button.
4. Press and hold the ENTER button for about 10 seconds to enter the reset mode.
5. Press 3 / 4 to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All Due Items
(You can also select Cancel to end the process).
6. Press the ENTER button to reset the selected item.
7. Repeat from step 4 for other items you wish to reset.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

553 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
1.5 L engine models

Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)

Battery

Maintenance

Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank
Radiator Cap

Continued

553

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

554 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood

2.4 L engine models

Engine Oil Fill Cap
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)

Battery
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)

Maintenance

Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank

Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)

Radiator Cap

554

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.

NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in
damage to the hood and/or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.

Pull

3. Push the hood latch lever (located under
the front edge of the hood to the center) to
the side and raise the hood. Once you have
raised the hood slightly, you can release the
lever.

Lever

Grip

When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Maintenance

4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.

Support Rod

Clamp

1Opening the Hood

555

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil
• Genuine Honda Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown.

Maintenance

Ambient Temperature

■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.

556

1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
1.5 L engine models
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.

1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil, being careful not to overfill.

2.4 L engine models

Maintenance

Continued

557

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

558 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

1.5 L engine models

Upper Mark
Lower Mark
2.4 L engine models

Upper Mark
Lower Mark
Maintenance

558

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.

1.5 L engine models

Engine Oil
Fill Cap

1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.

2.4 L engine models

Engine Oil
Fill Cap
Maintenance

559

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Specialized equipment and procedures are required to change the engine oil and oil
filter. Have an authorized Honda dealer replace them.
Do not attempt to change the engine oil and oil filter yourself.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the
information display */driver information interface *.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
1.5 L engine models
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the phillips head screws and
slotted head screws by turning 90°
counterclockwise on the undercarriage
and remove the under cover.
Screw
Under Cover
Maintenance

2.4 L engine models

Under Cover

Screw

560

* Not available on all models

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

561 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.

1.5 L engine models

Drain Bolt
Washer
2.4 L engine models

Drain Bolt

Washer
Maintenance

Continued

561

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

1.5 L engine models

Oil Filter

2.4 L engine models

Oil Filter

5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil filter gasket.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including filter):
1.5 L engine models

3.7 US qt (3.5 L)
Maintenance

562

2.4 L engine models

4.6 US qt (4.4 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and
then check the oil level on the dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
13. Reinstall the under cover in the same order
it was removed.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
Be sure to verify that the oil filter is designed for your
vehicle. A genuine Honda oil filter is recommended
for optimum lubrication flow and filtration properties
to assure the reliability of the engine.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

1.5 L engine models

Engine Coolant
1Engine Coolant

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

■ Checking the Coolant
Reserve Tank

Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the reserve tank
cap.
NOTICE

MIN
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use
another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or
fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Maintenance

MAX

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
u If the coolant level is below the MIN
mark, add the specified coolant until it
reaches the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

3 WARNING
Removing the reserve tank cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle's cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
Continued

563

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

■ Adding the Coolant

Reserve Tank
Cap

Maintenance

564

1Adding the Coolant

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Turn the reserve tank cap 1/8 turn
counterclockwise and relieve any pressure
in the coolant system.
3. Push down and turn the reserve tank cap
counter-clockwise to remove it.
4. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark.
5. Put the reserve tank cap back on, and
tighten it fully.

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

2.4 L engine models

Engine Coolant
1Engine Coolant

■ Reserve Tank
MAX

MIN

Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
NOTICE

Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your
vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below
this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant
should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use
another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or
fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Maintenance

Reserve
Tank

3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle's cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.

Continued

565

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

■ Radiator

1Radiator

Radiator Cap

Maintenance

566

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn
counterclockwise and relieve any pressure
in the coolant system.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Transmission Fluid
■ Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the continuously variable transmission fluid
yourself.

1Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid
NOTICE

Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle’s transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda’s
new vehicle limited warranty.

Maintenance

567

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid

Brake Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

NOTICE

■ Checking the Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reserve
tank.

Reserve tank

MAX
MIN

1Brake Fluid
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.

Maintenance

568

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.

Canadian models with driver information interface

If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the driver information interface.
All models

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

Maintenance

569

Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1Headlight Bulbs

High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
High beam headlight: LED type *
Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type) *
Low beam headlight: LED type *

■ High Beam Headlight

Bulb
Tab
Coupler

1. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
2. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove.
3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it clockwise.
4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

Models with halogen headlights

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have
the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Models with LED headlights

Maintenance

Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda
dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

570

* Not available on all models

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

■ Low Beam Headlights
Holding clip

1Low Beam Headlights
Passenger side

1. Remove the holding clip using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then remove the upper part of
the window washer reserve tank.

Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
Center pin

Both side

Bulb

Coupler

Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.

Push until the
pin is flat.

Maintenance

Tab

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it clockwise.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

571

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *

Fog Light Bulbs *
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Fog Light: 35 W (H8 for halogen bulb type)

Screw

Holding clip

Maintenance

572

* Not available on all models

1. Remove the screw using a Phillips-head
screwdriver and remove the holding clips
using a flat-tip screwdriver.
2. Pull down the under cover.

1Fog Light Bulbs *
NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its
plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with
your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *

3. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Right side

4. Rotate the old bulb clockwise to remove.
5. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it counter-clockwise.
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

Bulb

Tab

Coupler

1Fog Light Bulbs *
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.

Left side

Bulb

Coupler

4. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove.
5. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it clockwise.
6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.

Tab
Maintenance

* Not available on all models

573

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

574 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuParking/Daytime Running Lights

Parking/Daytime Running Lights
Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Turn Signal/Front Side Marker Lights
Front turn signal lights/front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized
Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights *
Side turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.

Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side
Marker Lights
Maintenance

574

Brake/taillight, rear turn signal light and rear side marker lights are LED type. Have
an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

* Not available on all models

uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight and Back-Up Lights

Taillight and Back-Up Lights
When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1Taillight and Back-Up Lights
Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda
dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Taillight: LED
Back-Up Light: 16W
1. Remove the lower taillight assembly.
2 Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Lights P. 574

Cover

Bulb

3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
Maintenance

Socket

2. Remove the cover by prying on the edge
using a flat-tip screwdriver.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.

575

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

576 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light

Rear License Plate Light
Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.

High-Mount Brake Light
High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.

Maintenance

576

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.

1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it
may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.

2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the holder
off the wiper arm.

Maintenance

Tab

Continued

577

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

578 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

Blade

3. Pull the end of the wiper blade to the
direction of the arrow in the image until it
unfastens from the holder’s end cap.

End Cap At
The Bottom

4. Pull the wiper blade in the opposite
direction to slide it out of the holder.

Blade

Holder

Maintenance

Blade

Holder

Cap

578

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
6. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm, then
push down the lock tab.
7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off.
2. Pivot the bottom end of the holder up until
it comes off from the wiper arm.

Wiper Arm

1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
rear window.

3. Slide the blade out of the holder.
Blade

4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and
mount to a new rubber blade.

Continued

Maintenance

Retainer

579

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

580 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Holder

Maintenance

580

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder.
u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then
install the wiper blade assembly onto the
wiper arm.

Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

■ Inflation guidelines

1Checking Tires

3 WARNING

Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.

Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
checked when cold.

■ Inspection guidelines

Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
P. 503

Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 586

• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

Maintenance

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1–2 psi (10–20
kPa, 0.1–0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before
long trips.

581

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Label
Example

1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.

Tire Labeling
Example

Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)

The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.

Maintenance

Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size

■ Tire Sizes
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

582

1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
P235/60 R18 102T
P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
235: Tire width in millimeters.
60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
18: Rim diameter in inches.
102: Load index (a numerical code associated with
the maximum load the tire can carry).
T: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

■ Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

■ Glossary of Tire Terminology

DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week

Maintenance

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

583

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.

■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

Maintenance

584

■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

■ Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.

1Traction

■ Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

1Temperature

Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Maintenance

585

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

586 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.

Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

Maintenance

586

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire‘s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.

Maintenance

587

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display */
driver information interface * helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire
life.

■ Tires without rotation marks

1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Rotate the tires as shown here.
Front
Front
Direction Mark

■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
Maintenance

588

Front

* Not available on all models

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
P. 503

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked “M+S” tires, snow
tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles
when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.

1Winter Tires

3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN TC2111MM
Models with 235/60R18 tires

Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN TC2212MM
• Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.

NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.

Maintenance

Models with 235/65R17 tires

Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.

589

Battery
Checking the Battery
The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative
terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information
interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have you vehicle inspected
by a dealer.

1Battery

3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.

Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Audio System Theft Protection P. 232

• The clock resets.
2 Clock P. 132

• Canadian models only: The immobilizer system needs to be reset.
2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 91

Maintenance

590

A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.

WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.

uuBatteryuCharging the Battery

Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

1Battery
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Consult a dealer for more information.

Maintenance

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *, Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM) System *, Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA®) system, VSA® OFF, Collision Mitigation
Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *, low tire pressure/Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) *, and Parking
Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along
with a message in the Driver Information Interface *
when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1 after
re-connecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/
h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

591

Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

■ Master Keys with Remote Transmitter *
Screw

Battery type: CR1620
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillipshead screwdriver.

Battery

Maintenance

592

* Not available on all models

2. Open the remote transmitter.
u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.
3. Remove the button battery with the small
flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.

1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

593 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery

■ Smart Entry Remote *
Battery type: CR2032
1. Remove the built-in key.

Battery

Maintenance

* Not available on all models

2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.

593

Climate Control System Maintenance
Air Conditioning
To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE
J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians.

1Climate Control System Maintenance
NOTICE

Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one
removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment.
To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the
evaporator with one removed from a used or
salvaged vehicle.

New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and
labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
flammable and can be ignited during servicing if
proper procedures are not followed.
Air conditioner label is found under the hood:
2 Safety Labels P. 77
2 Specifications P. 636
Canadian models

: Caution
: Flammable Refrigerant
Maintenance

: Requires Registered
Technician to Service

Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

594

: Air Conditioning
System
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
contact a dealer for replacement.

Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

■ Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Loop

1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical
devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are
splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or
cause a fire inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.

■ Cleaning the Window

1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Maintenance

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass
cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front
sensor camera * and the rainfall/light sensor *.

* Not available on all models

Continued

595

uuCleaninguInterior Care

■ Floor Mats

Unlock

Lock

1Floor Mats

The driver's floor mat hooks over floor
anchors, which keep them from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.

If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.

■ Maintaining Genuine Leather *

Maintenance

596

To properly clean leather:
1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%
water and 10% neutral soap.
3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.

* Not available on all models

1Maintaining Genuine Leather *
It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as
soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting
in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the
leather. In addition, please note that some dark
colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats
resulting in discoloration or stains.

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

■ Washing the Vehicle

1Washing the Vehicle

Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
cause a malfunction.

■ Using an Automated Car Wash
• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
• Fold in the door mirrors.
• Automatic intermittent wiper equipment vehicles, wipers switch to OFF.

• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.

Continued

Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the
fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel
system or engine.

Maintenance

■ Using High Pressure Cleaners

Air Intake Vents

597

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.

■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.

■ Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
Maintenance

598

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent
to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals
(including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish
on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish,
the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains,
wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

1Applying Wax
NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

599 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Maintenance

599

Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS Airbag, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 628

• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability,
or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.
Maintenance

The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/J2534 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended
to be used only with automobile system diagnostic devices. Use of any other type of device
may adversely affect the vehicle's electronic systems or allow them to be compromised,
and could result in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance.
Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any
modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet
federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.

600

1Accessories and Modifications

3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 602
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 603
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine ........................ 610

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is
Weak..........................................611
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 612
Jump Starting.................................... 613
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 616
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 617

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On................................................ 621
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 621
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 622
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On or Blinks .......................................623
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake
System Indicator (Amber) Comes On ..... 624

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On........................... 625
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 627
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 628
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 631
Emergency Towing........................... 632
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate ..633
Refueling .................................................634

601

Tools
Types of Tools
1Types of Tools
The tools are stored in the cargo area.

Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle

Jack Handle Bar
Jack
Handling the Unexpected

602

Jack

Tool Bag

Funnel

If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare
tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever to (P .
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1.

1Changing a Flat Tire
Follow compact spare precautions:
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

Handling the Unexpected

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

NOTICE

Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call
your dealer or a professional towing service.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
Continued

603

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

604 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1. Open the cargo area floor lid.

Handling the Unexpected

Tool Bag

2. Take the tool bag out of the cargo area.
Take the wheel nut wrench and jack handle
bar out of the tool bag.

Spare Tire

3. Take the jack out of the spare tire area.
4. Unscrew the wing bolt and remove the
spacer cone. Then remove the spare tire.

604

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

605 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

5. Place a wheel block or rock in the front and
rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

The tire to be replaced.

Wheel
Blocks

7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

6. Place the compact spare tire under the
vehicle body (wheel side up) near the tire
that needs to be replaced.

605

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ How to Set Up the Jack

1How to Set Up the Jack

1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.

3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Turn the end bracket clockwise (as shown
in image) until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may
not support the weight (“load”) or their shape may
not match.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and
can seriously injure the occupants.

Jack
Handle
Bar

606

Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before
driving.

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Replacing the Flat Tire

1Replacing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop
rotating.

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

Continued

607

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Storing the Flat Tire

1Storing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the center cap.

Center Cap

3 WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Remove the cargo area lid as shown.

Lid
For compact spare tire
Wing
Bolt

Spacer Cone

608

For full-size tire

3. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
4. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
5. Securely store the wheel nut wrench and
jack handle bar back in the tool bag. Store
the bag in the cargo area properly.
6. Store the jack in its holder. Turn the jack’s
end bracket to lock it in place.

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ TPMS and the Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressures Low
appears on the driver information interface *, but this is normal.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 503

Handling the Unexpected

* Not available on all models

609

Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.

1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 613

Starter condition
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.

Checklist
Models with smart entry system

Check for a message on the driver information interface *.
● If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 611

uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.

Handling the Unexpected

2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 172

Check the brightness of the interior lights.
Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.
● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Battery P. 590

If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 628
The starter turns over normally, Review the engine start procedure.
but the engine doesn’t start.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 446
There may be a problem with a
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
fuse. Check each of the items on
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
the right and respond accordingly.
2 Immobilizer System P. 161
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2Fuel Gauge P. 117
Check the fuses.
Check all fuses or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
●

2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 631

If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 632

610

* Not available on all models

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

611 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

Models with smart entry system

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

2. Depress the brake pedal and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button within 10
seconds after the beeper sounds and the
indicator changes from flashing to on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.

Handling the Unexpected

If the beeper sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message
appears on the driver information interface; and the ENGINE START/STOP button
flashes and the engine will not start. Start the engine as follows:
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the smart
entry remote while the ENGINE START/
STOP button is flashing.
The buttons on the smart entry remote
should be facing you.
u The ENGINE START/STOP button
flashes for about 30 seconds.

611

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

Models with smart entry system

Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.

Handling the Unexpected

612

The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, change the shift lever to (P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
Canadian models

Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake
pedal.

1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.

Jump Starting
■ Jump Starting Procedure

1Jump Starting

3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.

Handling the Unexpected

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as the audio and lights. Turn off the
engine, then open the hood.
1. Open the terminal cover on your vehicle’s
battery positive + terminal.
2. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle's battery + terminal.
3. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using an automotive battery
+ Terminal
charger to boost your 12-volt battery,
select a lower charging voltage than 15
volts. Check the charger manual for the
proper setting.
4. Connect the second jumper cable to the
1.5 L engine models
booster battery - terminal.

Booster Battery

Continued

613

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

614 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuJump Startingu

2.4 L engine models

Booster Battery

Handling the Unexpected

1.5 L engine models

2.4 L engine models

614

5. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine hanger (as
shown). Do not connect this jumper cable
to any other part.
6. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
7. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

uuJump Startingu

■ What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order:
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *, Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM) System *, Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA®) system, VSA® OFF, Collision Mitigation
Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *, low tire pressure/Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) *, and Parking
Brake and Brake System (Amber) may come on along
with a message in the Driver Information Interface *
when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1 after
reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/
h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Handling the Unexpected

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

1What to Do After the Engine Starts

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

615

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

616 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.

■ Releasing the Lock
1. Set the parking brake.
Slot

Models without smart entry system

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

Handling the Unexpected

2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.
Cover

Release Button

Shift Lock Release Slot

616

All models

3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot (as shown in image) and remove
the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button, and place the shift
lever into (N .
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.

Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
• Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message appears on
the driver information interface. *
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.

■ First thing to do

Continued

NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
needle at the H mark may damage the engine.

Handling the Unexpected

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.

* Not available on all models

1How to Handle Overheating

617

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

■ Next thing to do

1How to Handle Overheating

1.5 L engine models

Reserve
Tank

MAX
Handling the Unexpected

618

MIN

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle goes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level, and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level, in the reserve tank is
low, or no coolant in the tank, check that
the radiator is cool. Cover the reserve
tank cap with a heavy cloth and open the
cap. Add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark and put the cap back on.

3 WARNING
Removing the reserve tank cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the reserve tank
cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

2.4 L engine models

1How to Handle Overheating

Reserve
Tank

MAX

MIN

Handling the Unexpected

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle goes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.

■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it, and check the temperature
gauge.
If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone
down, contact a dealer for repairs.

Continued

619

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

■ The Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot Message
Appears On The Driver Information Interface. *
The Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message appears
on the driver information interface when the engine temperature is high.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages * P. 104

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
u Move the shift lever to (P , and set the parking brake. Turn off all accessories
and turn on the hazard warning lights.
2. Keep the engine running, and wait until the message disappears.
u If the message does not disappear, have the vehicle inspected at a dealer.
Handling the Unexpected

620

* Not available on all models

1How to Handle Overheating
Continuing to drive with the Stop Driving When
Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message on
the driver information interface may damage the
engine.

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minutes.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

2 Oil Check P. 557

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical
systems. Immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.

Handling the Unexpected

3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.
u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

621

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink

Handling the Unexpected

622

• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks
U.S.

Canada

(Red)

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same
time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes
on, the parking brake may not work.
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On or Blinks at the Same Time When the
Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
P. 624

Handling the Unexpected

• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
■ Reason for the indicator to blink
• There is a problem with the electric parking brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.

623

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System
Indicator (Amber) Comes On
U.S.

Canada

(Red)
Handling the Unexpected

624

U.S.

Canada

(Amber)

■ If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the
same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,
release the parking brake manually or automatically.
2 Parking Brake P. 508

• If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at
the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,
stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer
immediately.
u Preventing the vehicle from moving
Move the shift lever to (P .
• If the brake system indicator (amber) comes on alone, avoid using the
parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

1 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same
Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able
to release it.
If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake
system indicator (amber) come on at the same time,
the parking brake is working.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same
time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes
on, the parking brake may not work because it is
checking the system.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

625 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on

* Not available on all models

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
• Comes on when EPS steering angle center point memory is lost. This
could be due to a number of problems to include: battery disconnect,
main fuse blow, low battery causing reset of the EPS system, wire
damage to EPS harness. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF) *, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *,
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) system, VSA® OFF, Collision Mitigation
Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *, low tire pressure/Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) *, and Parking Brake and Brake System
(Amber) indicators also come on along with a message in the Driver
Information Interface *.

625

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

626 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

Handling the Unexpected

626

■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
• If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *,
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *, Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA®) system, VSA® OFF, Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) *, low tire pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) *, and Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) indicators
come on along with a message in the Driver Information Interface *,
you need to calibrate the VSA and EPS systems.
Drive at a speed of more than 12 mph (20 km/h) for less than 10
seconds to calibrate the VSA and EPS systems.
If the indicators come on and stay on, park your vehicle in a safe
place, turn off and restart the engine, then repeat the above
operation.
If the indicators still come on and stay on, immediately have your
vehicle inspected by a dealer.

* Not available on all models

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink

2 TPMS Calibration P. 503

■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator will go off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
u Calibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 503

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

Handling the Unexpected

A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed,
the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully avoiding abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.

627

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

628 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating

■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Handling the Unexpected

Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.

IG Main 1

Tab

4
5

628

* Not available on all models

Circuit Protected
Audio AMP *
Electric Brake Booster
Main Fan Motor
Relay Module 1
IG Main 2*2
Relay Module 2
Battery
EPS

Fuse Box Option
Fuse Box
Front Wiper Motor
Sub Fan Motor
Rear Defroster
Starter Motor
Fuse Box
ABS/VSA Motor
ABS/VSA FSR
Blower Motor
Option Block 1 *
Option Block 2 *
−
Power Tail Gate *
VB ACT*4

Amps
(30 A)
40 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
125 A
70 A
30 A*2
50 A*3
(40 A)
60 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
(40 A)
(40 A)
−
(40 A)
(7.5 A)

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Circuit Protected
Washer
FI Main
FI Sub*4
DBW*5
Stop Lights
Injector
LAF
FI ECU*4
−*5
Front Wiper Deicer *
Hazard
IG Coil
Transmission*4
−*5
−
Back Up
Audio
AWD *

Amps
15 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
−
(15 A)
10 A
15 A
(15 A)
−
−
10 A
15 A
(20 A)

*1:Models with the smart entry system have
an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
*2:Models with smart entry system
*3:Models without smart entry system
*4:1.5L engine models
*5:2.4L engine models

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

629 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

21
22
23

Amps
(20 A)
−

■ Interior Fuse Box
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse Label

(15 A)

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
2
3

10 A

10 A
7.5 A
−
−
(7.5 A)
−
−

5
6
7
8
9

*1:Canadian models with rear seat heater
*2:Models without rear seat heater
*3:Models with fog lights
*4:Models without smart entry system

Fuse Box

Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the steering column lower cover.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Circuit Protected
Accessory
Key Lock
Option
Option*1
Transmission*2, *3
Option
SRS Indicator
Meter
Fuel Pump
A/C
Accessory Power Socket
(Center Console)
Engine Control*3
Passenger's Side Door Lock
Driver's Side Door Unlock
Rear Driver's Side Power
Window
Front Passenger's Side
Power Window
Door Lock
Transmission*1, *3
Option*2

Amps
10 A
5A
10 A
5A
(10 A)
10 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
(20 A)
5A
10 A
10 A
20 A

Handling the Unexpected

24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Circuit Protected
Rear Seat Heater*1
−*2
Front Fog Lights*3/Lower
Shutter Grille
A/C Compressor/Upper
Shutter Grille
Horn
Cooling Fan
−
−
ST Magnetic Switch*4
−
−

20 A
20 A
(10 A)
5A

*1:Models with smart entry system
*2:Models without smart entry system
*3:1.5L engine models
Continued

629

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

630 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

18
19
20
21
22
23
Handling the Unexpected

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

630

Circuit Protected
Front Driver's Lumber
support *
Moonroof *
Starter
ACG
Daytime Running Light
Steering Wheel Heater*1
Handsfree Power Tailgate
Sensor *
Option
Driver's Door Lock
Passenger's Side Door
Unlock
Rear Passenger's Side
Power Window
Driver's Power Window
Front Accessory Power
Socket
Smart Entry*1
STS*2
Driver's Power Seat
Reclining *
Front Seat Heater *
Driver's Power Seat Sliding *
ABS/VSA
SRS
HAC Option *

* Not available on all models

Amps
(10 A)
(20 A)
10 A
10 A
10 A
(10 A)
5A
(10 A)
10 A

37
38
39
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h

20 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
5A
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
10 A
10 A
20 A

Circuit Protected
Trailer *
Driver's Side Door Lock
Driver's Door Unlock
Power Tailgate Closer *
Passenger's Power Seat
Sliding *
Passenger's Power Seat
Reclining *
Panorama Shade Motor*3
Rear Blower
EPT L
EPT R
Accessory Power Socket
(Cargo Area)*4

Amps
15 A
10 A
(10 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)

*1:Canadian models with steering heater
*2:Models without smart entry system
*3:Canadian models with panoramic roof
*4:Canadian models

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Inspecting and Changing Fuses
Blown Fuse

Combined
Fuse

4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with
the fuse puller, and replace it with a new
one.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 628 to 630.
Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and
conform the specific amperage on the fuse label.
2 Fuse Locations P. 628
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.

Handling the Unexpected

Fuse Puller

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

631

Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
All models

■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing
NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE

2WD models

■ Wheel lift equipment
Handling the Unexpected

632

The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.

Improper towing, such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
Make sure the parking brake is released. If you
cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must
be transported by the flat bed equipment.
2 Parking Brake P. 508

When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
■ What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure:
1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the
cover on the inside of the tailgate.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.

2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate
while pushing the lever to the right using a
flat-tip screw driver.

Models with power tailgate

Screwdriver

Following up:
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
vehicle checked.
When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure
there is enough space around the tailgate, and it
does not hit anyone or any object.

Handling the Unexpected

Cover

1When You Cannot Open the Tailgate

Lever
Models without power tailgate

Screwdriver

Lever

633

Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Press on the edge of the fuel fill door to
make it pop up slightly.
u The fuel fill door opens.
3. Take the funnel out of the tool case in the
cargo area.
2 Types of Tools P. 602
Funnel
Handling the Unexpected

634

4. Place the end of the funnel on the lower
part of filler opening, then insert it slowly
and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the funnel
goes down along with the filler pipe.
5. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel
container.
u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.
6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck.
u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before
storing it.
7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container
or any funnel other than the one provided with your
vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.
Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel
tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel
system and its seal.
Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is
gasoline before you refuel.

Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 636
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number ......................................... 638
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 640
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 641

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 642
Warranty Coverages ........................ 644
Authorized Manuals......................... 646
Customer Service Information......... 647

635

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

636 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Specifications
■ Vehicle Specifications

■ Air Conditioning

Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)

Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity

Honda CR-V
2
3
5
U.S.:
Canada:
U.S.:
Canada:
U.S.:

4,695 lbs (2,130 kg)
2,130 kg
2,425 lbs (1,100 kg)
1,100 kg
2,292 lbs (1,040 kg)*1
2,369 lbs (1,075 kg)*2
Canada: 1,040 kg*1
1,075 kg*2

*1: 2WD models
*2: AWD models

HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
14.6 – 16.4 oz (415 – 465 g)*1
15.3 – 17.1 oz (435 – 485 g)*2
RB100EV-01*1
RL85HM (POE)*2
5.80 - 6.53 cu-in (95 - 107 cm3)*1
4.70 - 6.28 cu-in (77 – 103 cm3)*2

Lubricant Type
Quantity
*1: 2.4 L engine models
*2: 1.5 L engine models

■ Engine Specifications
Displacement

Spark Plugs

143.72 cu-in (2,356 cm3)*1
91.38 cu-in (1,498 cm3)*2
DILKAR7H11GS*1
DILKAR7G11GS*1
NGK
ILZKAR8J8SY*2
DENSO
DXE22HQR-D11S*1

Information

636

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
14 US gal (53 L)

■ Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity

* Not available on all models

Headlights (High Beam)
Fog Lights *
Front Turn Signal/
Front Side Marker Lights
Daytime Running/Parking Lights
Side Turn Signal Lights *
Tail and Brake/Rear Turn Signal/
Rear Side Marker Lights
Back-Up Lights
Taillights
High-Mount Brake Light
Rear License Plate Light
Interior Lights
Map Lights

Cargo Area Light
Vanity Mirror Lights *

■ Fuel
Fuel Tank Capacity

Headlights (Low Beam)

Ceiling Light

*1: 2.4 L engine models
*2: 1.5 L engine models

Type

■ Light Bulbs

U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

55 W (H11) *
LED *
60 W (HB3) *
LED *
35 W (H8)
LED
LED
LED
LED
16 W
LED
LED
LED
8W
8 W*
LED *
5W
1.4 W

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

637 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake Fluid
Specified

■ Engine Oil
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■ Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid
Specified
Capacity

Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid
3.9 US qt (3.7 L)*1
Change
4.5 US qt (4.3 L)*2

*1: 2WD models
*2: AWD models

Capacity

*1: 2.4 L engine models
*2: 1.5 L engine models

■ Engine Coolant

■ Rear Differential Fluid *
Specified
Capacity

Recommended

■ Tire

·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
4.4 US qt (4.2 L)*1
Change
3.4 US qt (3.2 L)*2
Change including 4.7 US qt (4.4 L)*1
filter
3.7 US qt (3.5 L)*2

Honda DPSF-II
Change
1.32 US qt (1.25 L)

Specified
Ratio

Capacity

Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.65 US gal (6.24 L)*1
1.64 US gal (6.20 L)*2
(change including the remaining 0.17 US gal
(0.65 L) in the reserve tank)*1
(change including the remaining 0.2 US gal
(0.75 L) in the reserve tank)*2

Regular

Compact
Spare
Wheel Size

Size*1
Pressure*1
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Size*2
Pressure*2
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare

235/65R17 104H
Front 32 (220 [2.2])
Rear
30 (210 [2.1])
235/60R18 103H
Front 33 (230 [2.3])
Rear
30 (210 [2.1])
T155/90D17 112M
60 (420 [4.2])
17 x 7 1/2J*1
18 x 7 1/2J*2
17 x 4T

*1: Vehicle with 17 inch wheel
*2: Vehicle with 18 inch wheel

*1: 2.4 L engine models
*2: 1.5 L engine models

Information

* Not available on all models

637

Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number,
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are
shown as follows:

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and
Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.

1.5 L engine models

Engine Number

Vehicle Identification Number

Cover

Information

638

Continuously Variable
Transmission Number

Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification Number

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

639 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuIdentification NumbersuVehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number

2.4 L engine models

Engine Number

Continuously Variable
Transmission Number

Vehicle Identification Number

Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification Number
Information

639

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

640 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
HondaLink *
Immobilizer System
Remote Transmitter
Smart Entry System *
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM*
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:

Information

640

As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
* Not available on all models

Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
Information

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.

641

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some States use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle's emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

Information

1. Fill the fuel tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P . Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there
for about 3 minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.

642

1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

643 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you
cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for
at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.

Information

643

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

644 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Warranty Coverages
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against
rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Information

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.

644

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

645 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

■ EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report
violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
Information

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Transportation and Air Quality
Compliance Division, Light-Duty Vehicle Group
Attn: Warranty Complaints
2000 Traverwood Drive
Ann Arbor, MI 48105
Email: complianceinfo@epa.gov

645

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

646 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

■ For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

■ For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.

Information

646

Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal
with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced
with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Client
Relations/Services.

U.S. Owners
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009

Canadian Owners
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number P. 638
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

Information

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

1Customer Service Information

647

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

648

648 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

Index
Index
Numbers
4WD .......................................................... 502

Changing the Screen Interface ................ 277
Closing Apps........................................... 279
Customizing the Meter............................ 264
Display Setup .................................. 243, 281
Error Messages........................................ 327
General Information ................................ 332
Home Screen........................................... 270
HondaLink®............................................. 312
How to use Siri ® Eyes Free .............. 257, 319
iPod ................................................ 246, 298
Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 282
Menu Customize..................................... 278
MP3/WMA/AAC.............................. 251, 307
Pandora®......................................... 249, 305
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 254, 310
Playing SiriusXM® Radio .......................... 291
Reactivating ............................................ 232
Recommended Devices............................ 333
Remote Controls ..................................... 233
Security Code.......................................... 232
Selecting an Audio Source....................... 282
Song By VoiceTM (SBV) ............................. 301
Status Area ............................................. 276
Theft Protection ...................................... 232
USB Flash Drives ...................... 251, 307, 333
USB Port(s) .............................................. 231
Voice Control Operation.......................... 283
Wallpaper Setup.............................. 240, 268
Wi-Fi Connection .................................... 317
Audio/Information Screen ............... 238, 259
Authorized Manuals ................................ 646

Index

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 514
Accessories and Modifications ................ 600
Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 215
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF) ........................... 97, 467
Adding the Coolant ................................. 564
Additives
Coolant .......................................... 563, 565
Engine Oil ............................................... 556
Washer ................................................... 569
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 556
Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 205
Front Seats.............................................. 197
Head Restraints....................................... 201
Mirrors.................................................... 195
Rear Seats............................................... 204
Steering Wheel ....................................... 194
Temperature ................................... 120, 128
Adjusting the Sound........................ 242, 280
Agile Handling Assist............................... 496
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System).................................................... 224
Changing the Mode................................ 225
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 225

Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 594
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 225
Sensor ..................................................... 228
Synchronized Mode ................................. 227
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 224
Air Pressure ....................................... 582, 637
Airbags ........................................................ 49
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 55
Airbag Care ............................................... 62
Event Data Recorder .................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 52
Indicator .............................................. 60, 85
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 61
Sensors...................................................... 49
Side Airbags .............................................. 56
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 58
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) ............................ 502
AM/FM Radio .................................... 244, 287
Android AutoTM ........................................ 323
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 514
Indicator .................................................... 85
Apple CarPlayTM ........................................ 320
Armrest ..................................................... 205
Audio Remote Controls............................ 233
Audio System ............................ 230, 237, 258
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 242, 280
AM/FM Radio .................................. 244, 287
Android AutoTM ....................................... 323
Apple CarPlayTM ....................................... 320
Audio/Information Screen ................ 238, 259
Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout .. 263

649

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 146
Customize ............................................... 147
Auto High-Beam System .......................... 181
Automatic Brake Hold.............................. 512
Indicator ............................................ 82, 512
Automatic Intermittent Wipers ............... 186
Automatic Lighting .................................. 178
Average Fuel Economy..................... 119, 124
Average Speed.......................................... 124
AWD (All-Wheel Drive) ............................ 502

Index

650

Battery....................................................... 590
Charging System Indicator ................. 83, 621
Jump Starting .......................................... 613
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ........ 590
Maintenance (Replacing).......................... 592
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 40
Beverage Holders...................................... 213
Blind spot information (BSI) System ........ 497
Bluetooth® Audio ............................. 254, 310
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ............. 373, 396
Booster Seats (For Children)....................... 75
Brake System............................................. 508
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 514
Automatic Brake Hold.............................. 512
Brake Assist System ................................. 515
Fluid ........................................................ 568
Foot Brake ............................................... 511
Indicator (Red) ........................... 80, 623, 624

Parking Brake .......................................... 508
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel).... 188
Bulb Replacement .................................... 570
Brake/Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear
Side Marker Lights................................. 574
Fog Lights ............................................... 572
Front Turn Signal/ Front Side Marker
Lights .................................................... 574
Headlights............................................... 570
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 576
Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. 574
Rear License Plate Light ........................... 576
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights .................................................... 574
Taillight and Back-Up Lights .................... 575
Bulb Specifications ................................... 636

C
Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 76
Cargo Hook............................................... 218
Carrying Cargo ................................. 435, 437
Certification Label.................................... 638
Changing Bulbs ........................................ 570
Charging System Indicator................. 83, 621
Child Safety................................................. 63
Childproof Door Locks............................. 145
Child Seat.................................................... 63
Booster Seats ............................................ 75
Child Seat for Infants................................. 65
Child Seat for Small Children..................... 66

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 71
Larger Children ......................................... 74
Rear-facing Child Seat............................... 65
Selecting a Child Seat ............................... 67
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 145
Cleaning the Exterior............................... 597
Cleaning the Interior ............................... 595
Climate Control System ........................... 224
Changing the Mode................................ 224
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 225
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 594
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 225
Sensors ................................................... 228
Synchronized Mode ................................ 227
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 224
Clock ......................................................... 132
CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking
SystemTM) ................................................ 516
Coat Hook ................................................ 217
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) ................................................. 516
Compact Spare Tire.......................... 603, 637
Compass.................................................... 430
Continuously Variable Transmission ....... 454
Creeping................................................. 454
Fluid ....................................................... 567
Kickdown ............................................... 454
Operating the Shift Lever .................. 23, 456
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 616

Shifting................................................... 455
Controls .................................................... 131
Coolant (Engine) .............................. 563, 565
Adding the Coolant ................................ 564
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 566
Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 565
Overheating............................................ 617
Creeping (Continuously Variable
Transmission).......................................... 454
Cross Traffic Monitor ............................... 527
Cruise Control .................................. 458, 461
Indicator ................................................... 93
Cup Holders.............................................. 213
Customer Service Information ................ 647
Customized Features ............................... 337
Customizing the Auto Door Locking/
Unlocking Setting .................................. 147

Elapsed Time............................................. 124
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator............................................ 88, 625
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 494
Emergency ................................................ 632
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 642
Engine ....................................................... 638
Coolant........................................... 563, 565
Jump Starting.......................................... 613
Oil........................................................... 556
Starting ........................................... 446, 448
Switch Buzzer.................................. 171, 174
Engine Coolant................................. 563, 565
Adding the Coolant................................. 564
Adding to the Radiator............................ 566
Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 565
Overheating ............................................ 617
Temperature Gauge ................................ 117
Engine Oil ................................................. 556
Adding.................................................... 559
Checking................................................. 557
Displaying Oil Life............................ 543, 548
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 82, 621
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 556
ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 172
EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ...... 625
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 76
Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 597
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 196

Index

Daytime Running Lights .......................... 184
Dead Battery ............................................ 613
Defaulting All the Settings...................... 369
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows................................................. 225
Detachable Anchor .................................... 46
Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 640
Dimming
Headlights .............................................. 177
Rearview Mirror ...................................... 195
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 557

Directional Signals (Turn Signals) ............ 176
Display Setup .................................... 243, 281
Display/Information Button ..................... 121
Door Mirrors ............................................. 196
Doors ......................................................... 134
Auto Door Locking .................................. 146
Auto Door Unlocking............................... 146
Door Open Indicator ............................ 38, 87
Keys ........................................................ 134
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside..................................................... 144
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside.................................................. 137
Lockout Prevention System ...................... 143
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 584
Driver Information Interface ................... 121
Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support .................. 197
Driving....................................................... 433
Braking.................................................... 508
Continuously Variable Transmission ......... 454
Cruise Control ................................. 458, 461
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............... 444
Shifting Gear ........................................... 455
Starting the Engine .......................... 446, 448
Driving Position Memory System............. 192
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 594

Eco Assist System .......................................... 9
ECON Button............................................. 457

651

Index

652

Features..................................................... 229
Filters
Dust and Pollen ....................................... 594
Oil ........................................................... 560
Flat Tire ..................................................... 603
Floor Mats ................................................. 596
Fluids
Brake....................................................... 568
Continuously Variable Transmission ......... 567
Engine Coolant................................ 563, 565
Windshield Washer.................................. 569
FM/AM Radio .................................... 244, 287
Fog Light Indicator ..................................... 91
Folding Down the Rear Seats................... 204
Foot Brake................................................. 511
Front Airbags (SRS) ..................................... 52
Front Seat Heaters .................................... 221
Front Seats ................................................ 197
Adjusting................................................. 197
Front Sensor Camera ................................ 465
Fuel ...................................................... 25, 533
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions............. 536
Gauge ..................................................... 117
Instant Fuel Economy....................... 119, 128
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 84
Range.............................................. 119, 124
Recommendation .................................... 533
Refueling ................................................. 533
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions ............ 536
Fuel Fill Door............................................. 534

Fuses.......................................................... 628
Inspecting and Changing......................... 631
Locations......................................... 628, 629

G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions ............ 536
Gauge..................................................... 117
Information ............................................. 533
Instant Fuel Economy ...................... 119, 128
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 84
Refueling................................................. 533
Gauges ...................................................... 117
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Continuously Variable Transmission......... 455
Glass (care)........................................ 595, 598
Glove Box.................................................. 209

H
Handling the Unexpected........................ 601
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)....................... 373, 396
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Call History.................................... 386, 409
Caller’s ID Information............................. 384
Displaying Messages................................ 424
HFL Buttons..................................... 373, 396
HFL Menus ...................................... 375, 399
HFL Status Display ........................... 374, 398
In Case of Emergency.............................. 428

Limitations for Manual Operation.... 374, 398
Making a Call ................................. 390, 417
Options During a Call...................... 395, 421
Phone Setup ................................... 379, 404
Phonebook Phonetic Modification........... 413
Receiving a Call............................... 394, 420
Receiving a Text Message/E-mail ............. 422
Ring Tone ....................................... 384, 408
Selecting a Mail Account......................... 423
Speed Dial ...................................... 387, 410
To Clear the System ................................ 385
To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options .. 407
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4
HD RadioTM ............................................... 287
Head Restraints ........................................ 201
Headlights ................................................ 177
Aiming.................................................... 570
Auto High-Beam System ......................... 181
Automatic Operation .............................. 178
Dimming......................................... 177, 184
Operating ............................................... 177
Heated Door Mirror Button .................... 190
Heated Steering Wheel ........................... 220
Heated Windshield Button...................... 191
Heaters (Front Seat) ................................. 221
Heaters (Seat)........................................... 222
Heating and Cooling System
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 594
HFL (HandsFreeLink®) ...................... 373, 396
High Beam Indicator.................................. 90
Hill Start Assist System ..................... 447, 452

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ........... 370
Honda SensingTM ........................................ 26
HondaLink® .............................................. 312

iPod ................................................... 246, 298

J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 606
Jump Starting ........................................... 613

K
Key Number Tag....................................... 136
Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... 143
Keys ........................................................... 134
Lockout Prevention.................................. 143
Master Keys ............................................ 134
Number Tag ............................................ 136
Rear Door Won’t Open............................ 145
Remote Transmitter................................. 141
Types and Functions ................................ 134
Valet Key................................................. 135
Won’t Turn ............................................... 29
Kickdown (Continuously Variable
Transmission) .......................................... 454

L
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)......... 486
LaneWatchTM ............................................ 500
Language (HFL) ................................ 374, 398
LATCH (Child Seats).............................. 68, 72
Lights................................................. 177, 570
Automatic ............................................... 178
Bulb Replacement ................................... 570

Index

Identification Numbers............................ 638
Engine and Transmission......................... 638
Vehicle Identification............................... 638
Ignition Switch ......................................... 171
Illumination Control ................................ 188
Knob ...................................................... 188
Immobilizer System.................................. 161
Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 91
Indicators.................................................... 80
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)..................................... 98, 467
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 85
Automatic Brake Hold....................... 82, 512
Blind spot information (BSI)..................... 498
Brake Depressing ...................................... 94
Charging System............................... 83, 621
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) ................................ 99, 100, 101
Cruise Control .......................... 93, 459, 462
Cruise Main .............................. 93, 458, 461
Door Open.......................................... 38, 87
ECON Mode ..................................... 93, 457
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System ............................................ 88, 625
Fog Light .................................................. 91

High Beam ................................................ 90
Immobilizer System.................................... 91
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ...... 98, 99
Lights On................................................... 90
Low Fuel.................................................... 84
Low Oil Pressure ................................ 82, 621
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ..................... 89, 506
Maintenance Minder ......................... 93, 543
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 83, 622
Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber)... 81
Parking Brake and Brake System
(Red)........................................ 80, 623, 624
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)........ 95, 96
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 42, 84
Security System Alarm ............................... 92
Shift Lever Position .................................... 83
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 60, 85
System Message ........................................ 90
Tailgate Open ............................................ 87
Transmission.............................................. 84
Turn Signal ................................................ 90
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System............................................. 86, 494
VSA® OFF .......................................... 87, 495
Information............................................... 635
Information Display.................................. 118
Instant Fuel Economy ....................... 119, 128
Instrument Panel ........................................ 79
Brightness Control ................................... 188
Interior Lights ........................................... 206
Interior Rearview Mirror .......................... 195

653

Daytime Running Lights ........................... 184
Fog Lights................................................ 180
High Beam Indicator .................................. 90
Interior .................................................... 206
Light Switches ......................................... 177
Lights On Indicator .................................... 90
Turn Signals............................................. 176
Load Limits ................................................ 437
Locking/Unlocking .................................... 134
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 146
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 145
From Inside.............................................. 144
From Outside........................................... 137
Keys ........................................................ 134
Using a Key ............................................. 142
Lockout Prevention System...................... 143
Low Battery Charge.................................. 621
Low Fuel Indicator ...................................... 84
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 82, 621
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal
Strength................................................... 136
Lower Anchors ...................................... 68, 72
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit).............. 437
Lumbar Support........................................ 198
Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch ....... 198
Index

M
Maintenance ............................................. 539
Adding the Coolant ................................. 564
Battery..................................................... 590

654

Brake Fluid .............................................. 568
Cleaning ................................................. 595
Coolant........................................... 563, 565
Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 543
Oil........................................................... 557
Precautions ............................................. 540
Radiator .................................................. 566
Remote Transmitter................................. 592
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 570
Safety...................................................... 541
Service Items ................................... 545, 550
Tires ........................................................ 581
Transmission Fluid ................................... 567
Under the Hood ...................................... 553
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 83, 622
Map Lights ................................................ 207
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 437
Meters, Gauges......................................... 117
Mirrors ...................................................... 195
Adjusting ................................................ 195
Door ....................................................... 196
Exterior ................................................... 196
Interior Rearview ..................................... 195
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 600
Moonroof ................................................. 167
MP3 ................................................... 251, 307
Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 531

N
Numbers (Identification).......................... 638

O
Odometer ......................................... 118, 122
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............. 444
Oil (Engine) .............................................. 556
Adding ................................................... 559
Checking ................................................ 557
Displaying Oil Life ........................... 543, 548
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 82, 621
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 556
Viscosity.................................................. 556
Open Source Licenses .............................. 336
Opening/Closing
Hood ...................................................... 555
Moonroof ............................................... 167
Power Windows...................................... 164
Tailgate................................................... 150
Outside Temperature Display ......... 120, 128
Overheating ............................................. 617

P
Pandora® .......................................... 249, 305
Panic Mode............................................... 163
Panoramic Roof........................................ 168
Parking ..................................................... 526
Parking Brake........................................... 508
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
(Amber)..................................................... 81
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
(Red).......................................... 80, 623, 624
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator................. 61

Passing Indicators..................................... 177
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ............... 254, 310
Power Tailgate ......................................... 152
Power Windows ....................................... 164
Precautions While Driving....................... 453
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility
Vehicle.................................................. 453
Rain ........................................................ 453
Pregnant Women....................................... 47
Puncture (Tire) ......................................... 603

S
Safe Driving ................................................ 33
Safety Check ............................................... 38
Safety Labels ............................................... 77
Safety Message ............................................. 1
Seat Belts..................................................... 40
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor .................. 45
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners.................. 43
Checking ................................................... 48
Detachable Anchor .................................... 46
Fastening................................................... 44
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt.......................................................... 71
Pregnant Women ...................................... 47
Reminder................................................... 42
Warning Indicator................................ 42, 84
Seat Heaters.............................................. 222

Seats .......................................................... 197
Adjusting ................................................ 197
Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support .................. 197
Front Seat Heaters................................... 221
Front Seats .............................................. 197
Rear Seats ............................................... 204
Seat Heaters............................................ 222
Security System......................................... 161
Security System Alarm Indicator................. 92
Select Lever......................................... 23, 455
Operation.......................................... 23, 456
Releasing................................................. 616
Won’t Move............................................ 616
Selecting a Child Seat................................. 67
Selector Knob (Audio).............................. 237
Setting the Clock ...................................... 132
Shift Lever........................................... 23, 455
Shift Lever Position Indicator ............ 83, 456
Shifting (Transmission)............................. 455
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 45
Side Airbags................................................ 56
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 58
Siri® Eyes Free ................................... 257, 319
SiriusXM® Radio........................................ 291
Smart Entry System .................................. 137
Snow Tires................................................. 589
Song By VoiceTM (SBV) .............................. 301
Spare Tire.......................................... 603, 637
Spark Plugs ............................................... 636
Specifications............................................ 636
Specified Fuel ................................... 533, 636

Index

Radiator.................................................... 566
Radio (FM/AM) ................................. 244, 287
Radio (SiriusXM®)..................................... 291
Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 245, 289
Range................................................ 119, 124
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 245, 289
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ...... 642
Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control
SystemTM.................................................. 502
Rear Seat Heaters..................................... 222
Rear Seats (Folding Down) ...................... 204
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 195
Refueling .................................................. 533
Fuel Gauge ............................................. 117
Gasoline ......................................... 533, 636
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 84
Regulations .............................. 506, 584, 640
Remote Transmitter................................. 141

Replacement
Battery .................................................... 592
Bulbs ....................................................... 570
Fuses ............................................... 628, 629
Rear Wiper Blade Rubber ......................... 579
Tires ........................................................ 587
Wiper Blade Rubber................................. 577
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 641
Resetting a Trip Meter ..................... 119, 123
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).......... 482
On and Off .............................................. 483

655

Speedometer............................................. 117
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 52
Starting the Engine .......................... 446, 448
Does Not Start ......................................... 610
Engine Switch Buzzer....................... 171, 174
Jump Starting .......................................... 613
Steering Wheel ......................................... 194
Adjusting................................................. 194
Stopping.................................................... 526
Summer Tires ............................................ 589
Sunglasses Holder ..................................... 219
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........ 52
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................. 4, 5, 171
System Message Indicator .......................... 90

Index

656

Tachometer ............................................... 117
Tailgate ..................................................... 150
Tailgate Open Indicator.............................. 87
Unable to Open ....................................... 633
Temperature
Outside Temperature Display ........... 120, 128
Temperature Sensor ......................... 120, 128
Theft Protection........................................ 232
Time (Setting) ........................................... 132
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)...................................................... 503
Button ..................................................... 503
Indicator .................................................... 89

Tires........................................................... 581
Air Pressure ..................................... 582, 637
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 581
Inspection ............................................... 581
Labeling .................................................. 582
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 603
Regulations ............................................. 584
Rotation .................................................. 588
Spare Tire........................................ 603, 637
Summer .................................................. 589
Tire Chains .............................................. 589
Wear Indicators ....................................... 586
Winter..................................................... 589
Tonneau Cover ......................................... 223
Tools.......................................................... 602
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 439
Equipment and Accessories ..................... 440
Load Limits.............................................. 439
Towing Your Vehicle................................ 443
Behind a Motorhome .............................. 443
Emergency .............................................. 632
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) .................................................... 503
Button..................................................... 503
Indicator.................................................... 89
Transmission ............................................. 455
Continuously Variable ............................. 455
Fluid........................................................ 567
Number................................................... 638
Shift Lever Position Indicator.............. 83, 456
TRIP Knob ......................................... 118, 122

Trip Meter ........................................ 118, 122
Troubleshooting ...................................... 601
Blown Fuse ..................................... 628, 629
Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 30
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 30
Emergency Towing ................................. 632
Engine Won’t Start ................................. 610
Noise When Braking ................................. 31
Overheating............................................ 617
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 603
Rear Door Won’t Open ..................... 30, 145
Select Lever Won’t Move ........................ 616
Warning Indicators.................................... 80
Turbo Engine Vehicle .............................. 537
Turn Signals.............................................. 176
Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 90

U
Under-floor Storage Area ....................... 212
Unlocking the Doors................................ 137
Unlocking the Front Doors from the
Inside......................................................... 15
USB Flash Drives ....................... 251, 307, 333
USB Port(s)................................................ 231

V
Valet Key .................................................. 135
Vanity Mirrors .............................................. 7
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 638

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) ................. 494
Off Button .............................................. 495
Off Indicator ............................................. 87
System Indicator ....................................... 86
Viscosity (Oil).................................... 556, 637
Voice Control Operation ......................... 283
Audio Commands................................... 285
Climate Control Commands.................... 286
General Commands ................................ 286
Music Search Commands........................ 286
On Screen Commands ............................ 286
Phone Commands .................................. 285
Useful Commands .................................. 285
Voice Portal Screen ................................. 284
Voice Recognition ................................... 283
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) ................. 494

Index

Wallpaper......................................... 240, 268
Warning and Information
Messages......................................... 102, 103
Warning Indicator On/Blinking............... 621
Warning Labels .......................................... 77
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 644
Watts ........................................................ 636
WAV.......................................................... 251
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 586
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle)........... 606
Wi-Fi Connection ..................................... 317

Window Washers...................................... 185
Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 569
Switch ..................................................... 185
Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 164
Windshield ................................................ 185
Cleaning.......................................... 595, 598
Defrosting/Defogging .............................. 225
Washer Fluid ........................................... 569
Wiper Blades ........................................... 577
Wipers and Washers ................................ 185
Winter Tires .............................................. 589
Snow Tires............................................... 589
Tire Chains .............................................. 589
Wipers and Washers ................................. 185
Automatic Intermittent Wipers................. 186
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 577
Front ....................................................... 185
Rear ........................................................ 187
WMA ................................................. 251, 307
Worn Tires................................................. 581

657

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

658 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

659 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

17 CR-V-31TLA6000.book

660 ページ

２０１７年３月７日

火曜日

午後４時３９分

31TLA601
OM05577
00X31-TLA-6010

Printed in U.S.A

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 663
Create Date                     : 2017:03:28 13:12:27
Creator                         : PDFium
Producer                        : PDFium

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Honda Manual ATLA1717OM

ATLA1717OM 2017 Honda CR-V Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation